1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4: 2 * 3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar 4 * 5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions. 6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed. 7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code. 8 */ 9 10 /* 11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere 12 */ 13 14 #include "vim.h" 15 #include "version.h" 16 17 #ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H 18 # include <fcntl.h> /* for chdir() */ 19 #endif 20 21 static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir)); 22 static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name)); 23 static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u *src)); 24 25 /* 26 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line. 27 */ 28 int 29 get_indent() 30 { 31 return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 32 } 33 34 /* 35 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum". 36 */ 37 int 38 get_indent_lnum(lnum) 39 linenr_T lnum; 40 { 41 return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 42 } 43 44 #if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO) 45 /* 46 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer 47 * "buf". 48 */ 49 int 50 get_indent_buf(buf, lnum) 51 buf_T *buf; 52 linenr_T lnum; 53 { 54 return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts); 55 } 56 #endif 57 58 /* 59 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with 60 * 'tabstop' at "ts" 61 */ 62 int 63 get_indent_str(ptr, ts) 64 char_u *ptr; 65 int ts; 66 { 67 int count = 0; 68 69 for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr) 70 { 71 if (*ptr == TAB) /* count a tab for what it is worth */ 72 count += ts - (count % ts); 73 else if (*ptr == ' ') 74 ++count; /* count a space for one */ 75 else 76 break; 77 } 78 return count; 79 } 80 81 /* 82 * Set the indent of the current line. 83 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line. 84 * Caller must take care of undo. 85 * "flags": 86 * SIN_CHANGED: call changed_bytes() if the line was changed. 87 * SIN_INSERT: insert the indent in front of the line. 88 * SIN_UNDO: save line for undo before changing it. 89 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed. 90 */ 91 int 92 set_indent(size, flags) 93 int size; 94 int flags; 95 { 96 char_u *p; 97 char_u *newline; 98 char_u *oldline; 99 char_u *s; 100 int todo; 101 int ind_len; 102 int line_len; 103 int doit = FALSE; 104 int ind_done; 105 int tab_pad; 106 int retval = FALSE; 107 108 /* 109 * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of 110 * characters needed for the indent. 111 */ 112 todo = size; 113 ind_len = 0; 114 p = oldline = ml_get_curline(); 115 116 /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it 117 * isn't already set */ 118 119 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */ 120 if (!curbuf->b_p_et) 121 { 122 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of 123 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */ 124 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi) 125 { 126 ind_done = 0; 127 128 /* count as many characters as we can use */ 129 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p)) 130 { 131 if (*p == TAB) 132 { 133 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 134 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 135 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 136 if (todo < tab_pad) 137 break; 138 todo -= tab_pad; 139 ++ind_len; 140 ind_done += tab_pad; 141 } 142 else 143 { 144 --todo; 145 ++ind_len; 146 ++ind_done; 147 } 148 ++p; 149 } 150 151 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 152 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 153 if (todo >= tab_pad) 154 { 155 doit = TRUE; 156 todo -= tab_pad; 157 ++ind_len; 158 /* ind_done += tab_pad; */ 159 } 160 } 161 162 /* count tabs required for indent */ 163 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 164 { 165 if (*p != TAB) 166 doit = TRUE; 167 else 168 ++p; 169 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 170 ++ind_len; 171 /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */ 172 } 173 } 174 /* count spaces required for indent */ 175 while (todo > 0) 176 { 177 if (*p != ' ') 178 doit = TRUE; 179 else 180 ++p; 181 --todo; 182 ++ind_len; 183 /* ++ind_done; */ 184 } 185 186 /* Return if the indent is OK already. */ 187 if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT)) 188 return FALSE; 189 190 /* Allocate memory for the new line. */ 191 if (flags & SIN_INSERT) 192 p = oldline; 193 else 194 p = skipwhite(p); 195 line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1; 196 newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len); 197 if (newline == NULL) 198 return FALSE; 199 200 /* Put the characters in the new line. */ 201 s = newline; 202 todo = size; 203 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */ 204 if (!curbuf->b_p_et) 205 { 206 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of 207 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */ 208 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi) 209 { 210 p = oldline; 211 ind_done = 0; 212 213 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p)) 214 { 215 if (*p == TAB) 216 { 217 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 218 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 219 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 220 if (todo < tab_pad) 221 break; 222 todo -= tab_pad; 223 ind_done += tab_pad; 224 } 225 else 226 { 227 --todo; 228 ++ind_done; 229 } 230 *s++ = *p++; 231 } 232 233 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 234 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 235 if (todo >= tab_pad) 236 { 237 *s++ = TAB; 238 todo -= tab_pad; 239 } 240 241 p = skipwhite(p); 242 } 243 244 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 245 { 246 *s++ = TAB; 247 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 248 } 249 } 250 while (todo > 0) 251 { 252 *s++ = ' '; 253 --todo; 254 } 255 mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len); 256 257 /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */ 258 if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK) 259 { 260 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE); 261 if (flags & SIN_CHANGED) 262 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0); 263 /* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */ 264 if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum 265 && saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline)) 266 saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline); 267 retval = TRUE; 268 } 269 else 270 vim_free(newline); 271 272 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len; 273 return retval; 274 } 275 276 /* 277 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size) 278 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line. 279 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed. 280 */ 281 static int 282 copy_indent(size, src) 283 int size; 284 char_u *src; 285 { 286 char_u *p = NULL; 287 char_u *line = NULL; 288 char_u *s; 289 int todo; 290 int ind_len; 291 int line_len = 0; 292 int tab_pad; 293 int ind_done; 294 int round; 295 296 /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent 297 * Round 2: copy the characters. */ 298 for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round) 299 { 300 todo = size; 301 ind_len = 0; 302 ind_done = 0; 303 s = src; 304 305 /* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */ 306 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s)) 307 { 308 if (*s == TAB) 309 { 310 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 311 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 312 /* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 313 if (todo < tab_pad) 314 break; 315 todo -= tab_pad; 316 ind_done += tab_pad; 317 } 318 else 319 { 320 --todo; 321 ++ind_done; 322 } 323 ++ind_len; 324 if (round == 2) 325 *p++ = *s; 326 ++s; 327 } 328 329 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 330 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 331 if (todo >= tab_pad) 332 { 333 todo -= tab_pad; 334 ++ind_len; 335 if (round == 2) 336 *p++ = TAB; 337 } 338 339 /* Add tabs required for indent */ 340 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 341 { 342 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 343 ++ind_len; 344 if (round == 2) 345 *p++ = TAB; 346 } 347 348 /* Count/add spaces required for indent */ 349 while (todo > 0) 350 { 351 --todo; 352 ++ind_len; 353 if (round == 2) 354 *p++ = ' '; 355 } 356 357 if (round == 1) 358 { 359 /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent 360 * and the rest of the line. */ 361 line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1; 362 line = alloc(ind_len + line_len); 363 if (line == NULL) 364 return FALSE; 365 p = line; 366 } 367 } 368 369 /* Append the original line */ 370 mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len); 371 372 /* Replace the line */ 373 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE); 374 375 /* Put the cursor after the indent. */ 376 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len; 377 return TRUE; 378 } 379 380 /* 381 * Return the indent of the current line after a number. Return -1 if no 382 * number was found. Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list. 383 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers. 384 */ 385 int 386 get_number_indent(lnum) 387 linenr_T lnum; 388 { 389 colnr_T col; 390 pos_T pos; 391 regmmatch_T regmatch; 392 393 if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 394 return -1; 395 pos.lnum = 0; 396 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC); 397 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL) 398 { 399 regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE; 400 regmatch.rmm_maxcol = 0; 401 if (vim_regexec_multi(®match, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0)) 402 { 403 pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum; 404 pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col; 405 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 406 pos.coladd = 0; 407 #endif 408 } 409 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 410 } 411 412 if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL) 413 return -1; 414 getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL); 415 return (int)col; 416 } 417 418 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) 419 420 static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line)); 421 422 /* 423 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'. 424 */ 425 static int 426 cin_is_cinword(line) 427 char_u *line; 428 { 429 char_u *cinw; 430 char_u *cinw_buf; 431 int cinw_len; 432 int retval = FALSE; 433 int len; 434 435 cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1; 436 cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len); 437 if (cinw_buf != NULL) 438 { 439 line = skipwhite(line); 440 for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; ) 441 { 442 len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ","); 443 if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0 444 && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1]))) 445 { 446 retval = TRUE; 447 break; 448 } 449 } 450 vim_free(cinw_buf); 451 } 452 return retval; 453 } 454 #endif 455 456 /* 457 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line. 458 * 459 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the 460 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line. 461 * 462 * Caller must take care of undo. Since VREPLACE may affect any number of 463 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a 464 * new line. 465 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES delete spaces after cursor 466 * OPENLINE_DO_COM format comments 467 * OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL keep trailing spaces 468 * OPENLINE_MARKFIX adjust mark positions after the line break 469 * 470 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure 471 */ 472 int 473 open_line(dir, flags, old_indent) 474 int dir; /* FORWARD or BACKWARD */ 475 int flags; 476 int old_indent; /* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */ 477 { 478 char_u *saved_line; /* copy of the original line */ 479 char_u *next_line = NULL; /* copy of the next line */ 480 char_u *p_extra = NULL; /* what goes to next line */ 481 int less_cols = 0; /* less columns for mark in new line */ 482 int less_cols_off = 0; /* columns to skip for mark adjust */ 483 pos_T old_cursor; /* old cursor position */ 484 int newcol = 0; /* new cursor column */ 485 int newindent = 0; /* auto-indent of the new line */ 486 int n; 487 int trunc_line = FALSE; /* truncate current line afterwards */ 488 int retval = FALSE; /* return value, default is FAIL */ 489 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 490 int extra_len = 0; /* length of p_extra string */ 491 int lead_len; /* length of comment leader */ 492 char_u *lead_flags; /* position in 'comments' for comment leader */ 493 char_u *leader = NULL; /* copy of comment leader */ 494 #endif 495 char_u *allocated = NULL; /* allocated memory */ 496 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \ 497 || defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) 498 char_u *p; 499 #endif 500 int saved_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */ 501 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) 502 pos_T *pos; 503 #endif 504 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 505 int do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si 506 # ifdef FEAT_CINDENT 507 && !curbuf->b_p_cin 508 # endif 509 ); 510 int no_si = FALSE; /* reset did_si afterwards */ 511 int first_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */ 512 #endif 513 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 514 int vreplace_mode; 515 #endif 516 int did_append; /* appended a new line */ 517 int saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */ 518 519 /* 520 * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it 521 */ 522 saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline()); 523 if (saved_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */ 524 return FALSE; 525 526 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 527 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 528 { 529 /* 530 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be 531 * starting to replace. First make the new line empty and let vim play 532 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content. Then 533 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the 534 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto 535 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right 536 * stuff onto the replace stack. -- webb. 537 */ 538 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count) 539 next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1)); 540 else 541 next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)""); 542 if (next_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */ 543 goto theend; 544 545 /* 546 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts 547 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the 548 * line onto the replace stack. We'll push any other characters that 549 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent 550 * etc) a bit later. 551 */ 552 replace_push(NUL); /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */ 553 replace_push(NUL); 554 p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col; 555 while (*p != NUL) 556 replace_push(*p++); 557 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 558 } 559 #endif 560 561 if ((State & INSERT) 562 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 563 && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 564 #endif 565 ) 566 { 567 p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col; 568 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 569 if (do_si) /* need first char after new line break */ 570 { 571 p = skipwhite(p_extra); 572 first_char = *p; 573 } 574 #endif 575 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 576 extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra); 577 #endif 578 saved_char = *p_extra; 579 *p_extra = NUL; 580 } 581 582 u_clearline(); /* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */ 583 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 584 did_si = FALSE; 585 #endif 586 ai_col = 0; 587 588 /* 589 * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on 590 * the prior line, and it should be truncated. Do this even if 'ai' is not 591 * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai. 592 */ 593 if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai) 594 trunc_line = TRUE; 595 596 /* 597 * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what 598 * indent to use for the new line. 599 */ 600 if (curbuf->b_p_ai 601 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 602 || do_si 603 #endif 604 ) 605 { 606 /* 607 * count white space on current line 608 */ 609 newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 610 if (newindent == 0) 611 newindent = old_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */ 612 613 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 614 /* 615 * Do smart indenting. 616 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD) 617 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{' 618 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line 619 * "if (condition) {" 620 */ 621 if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL 622 && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{')) 623 { 624 char_u *ptr; 625 char_u last_char; 626 627 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 628 ptr = saved_line; 629 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 630 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 631 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE); 632 else 633 lead_len = 0; 634 # endif 635 if (dir == FORWARD) 636 { 637 /* 638 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are 639 * recognised as comments. 640 */ 641 if ( 642 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 643 lead_len == 0 && 644 # endif 645 ptr[0] == '#') 646 { 647 while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 648 ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 649 newindent = get_indent(); 650 } 651 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 652 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 653 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE); 654 else 655 lead_len = 0; 656 if (lead_len > 0) 657 { 658 /* 659 * This case gets the following right: 660 * \* 661 * * A comment (read '\' as '/'). 662 * *\ 663 * #define IN_THE_WAY 664 * This should line up here; 665 */ 666 p = skipwhite(ptr); 667 if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*') 668 p++; 669 if (p[0] == '*') 670 { 671 for (p++; *p; p++) 672 { 673 if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*') 674 { 675 /* 676 * End of C comment, indent should line up 677 * with the line containing the start of 678 * the comment 679 */ 680 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr); 681 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL) 682 { 683 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 684 newindent = get_indent(); 685 } 686 } 687 } 688 } 689 } 690 else /* Not a comment line */ 691 # endif 692 { 693 /* Find last non-blank in line */ 694 p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1; 695 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p)) 696 --p; 697 last_char = *p; 698 699 /* 700 * find the character just before the '{' or ';' 701 */ 702 if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';') 703 { 704 if (p > ptr) 705 --p; 706 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p)) 707 --p; 708 } 709 /* 710 * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple 711 * lines. eg: 712 * if (condition && 713 * condition) { 714 * Should line up here! 715 * } 716 */ 717 if (*p == ')') 718 { 719 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr); 720 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL) 721 { 722 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 723 newindent = get_indent(); 724 ptr = ml_get_curline(); 725 } 726 } 727 /* 728 * If last character is '{' do indent, without 729 * checking for "if" and the like. 730 */ 731 if (last_char == '{') 732 { 733 did_si = TRUE; /* do indent */ 734 no_si = TRUE; /* don't delete it when '{' typed */ 735 } 736 /* 737 * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'. 738 * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or 739 * '}'. 740 */ 741 else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}' 742 && cin_is_cinword(ptr)) 743 did_si = TRUE; 744 } 745 } 746 else /* dir == BACKWARD */ 747 { 748 /* 749 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are 750 * recognised as comments. 751 */ 752 if ( 753 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 754 lead_len == 0 && 755 # endif 756 ptr[0] == '#') 757 { 758 int was_backslashed = FALSE; 759 760 while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) && 761 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 762 { 763 if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\') 764 was_backslashed = TRUE; 765 else 766 was_backslashed = FALSE; 767 ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 768 } 769 if (was_backslashed) 770 newindent = 0; /* Got to end of file */ 771 else 772 newindent = get_indent(); 773 } 774 p = skipwhite(ptr); 775 if (*p == '}') /* if line starts with '}': do indent */ 776 did_si = TRUE; 777 else /* can delete indent when '{' typed */ 778 can_si_back = TRUE; 779 } 780 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 781 } 782 if (do_si) 783 can_si = TRUE; 784 #endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */ 785 786 did_ai = TRUE; 787 } 788 789 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 790 /* 791 * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader. 792 * This may then be inserted in front of the new line. 793 */ 794 end_comment_pending = NUL; 795 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 796 lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD); 797 else 798 lead_len = 0; 799 if (lead_len > 0) 800 { 801 char_u *lead_repl = NULL; /* replaces comment leader */ 802 int lead_repl_len = 0; /* length of *lead_repl */ 803 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */ 804 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */ 805 char_u *comment_end = NULL; /* where lead_end has been found */ 806 int extra_space = FALSE; /* append extra space */ 807 int current_flag; 808 int require_blank = FALSE; /* requires blank after middle */ 809 char_u *p2; 810 811 /* 812 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not 813 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader. 814 */ 815 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p) 816 { 817 if (*p == COM_BLANK) 818 { 819 require_blank = TRUE; 820 continue; 821 } 822 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE) 823 { 824 current_flag = *p; 825 if (*p == COM_START) 826 { 827 /* 828 * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader. 829 */ 830 if (dir == BACKWARD) 831 { 832 lead_len = 0; 833 break; 834 } 835 836 /* find start of middle part */ 837 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 838 require_blank = FALSE; 839 } 840 841 /* 842 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader. 843 */ 844 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of middle flags */ 845 { 846 if (*p == COM_BLANK) 847 require_blank = TRUE; 848 ++p; 849 } 850 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 851 852 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of end flags */ 853 { 854 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */ 855 if (*p == COM_AUTO_END) 856 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */ 857 ++p; 858 } 859 n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 860 861 if (end_comment_pending == -1) /* we can set it now */ 862 end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1]; 863 864 /* 865 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use 866 * the comment leader. 867 */ 868 if (dir == FORWARD) 869 { 870 for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p) 871 if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0) 872 { 873 comment_end = p; 874 lead_len = 0; 875 break; 876 } 877 } 878 879 /* 880 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader. 881 */ 882 if (lead_len > 0) 883 { 884 if (current_flag == COM_START) 885 { 886 lead_repl = lead_middle; 887 lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle); 888 } 889 890 /* 891 * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start 892 * comment leader, then put a space after the middle 893 * comment leader on the next line. 894 */ 895 if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1]) 896 && ((p_extra != NULL 897 && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len) 898 || (p_extra == NULL 899 && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL) 900 || require_blank)) 901 extra_space = TRUE; 902 } 903 break; 904 } 905 if (*p == COM_END) 906 { 907 /* 908 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader. 909 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the 910 * start (for C-comments). 911 */ 912 if (dir == FORWARD) 913 { 914 comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line); 915 lead_len = 0; 916 break; 917 } 918 919 /* 920 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader. 921 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards. 922 */ 923 while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',') 924 --p; 925 for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com 926 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl) 927 ; 928 lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl); 929 930 /* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on 931 * the comment-end */ 932 extra_space = TRUE; 933 934 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */ 935 for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++) 936 { 937 if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END) 938 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */ 939 } 940 if (end_comment_pending == -1) 941 { 942 /* Find last character in end-comment string */ 943 while (*p2 && *p2 != ',') 944 p2++; 945 end_comment_pending = p2[-1]; 946 } 947 break; 948 } 949 if (*p == COM_FIRST) 950 { 951 /* 952 * Comment leader for first line only: Don't repeat leader 953 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o". 954 */ 955 if (dir == BACKWARD) 956 lead_len = 0; 957 else 958 { 959 lead_repl = (char_u *)""; 960 lead_repl_len = 0; 961 } 962 break; 963 } 964 } 965 if (lead_len) 966 { 967 /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */ 968 leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space + 969 extra_len + 1); 970 allocated = leader; /* remember to free it later */ 971 972 if (leader == NULL) 973 lead_len = 0; 974 else 975 { 976 vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len); 977 978 /* 979 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted 980 */ 981 if (lead_repl != NULL) 982 { 983 int c = 0; 984 int off = 0; 985 986 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p) 987 { 988 if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT) 989 c = *p; 990 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-') 991 off = getdigits(&p); 992 } 993 if (c == COM_RIGHT) /* right adjusted leader */ 994 { 995 /* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */ 996 for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader 997 && vim_iswhite(*p); --p) 998 ; 999 ++p; 1000 1001 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1002 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in 1003 * screen characters, not bytes. */ 1004 { 1005 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl, 1006 lead_repl_len); 1007 int old_size = 0; 1008 char_u *endp = p; 1009 int l; 1010 1011 while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader) 1012 { 1013 mb_ptr_back(leader, p); 1014 old_size += ptr2cells(p); 1015 } 1016 l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p); 1017 if (l != 0) 1018 mch_memmove(endp + l, endp, 1019 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp)); 1020 lead_len += l; 1021 } 1022 #else 1023 if (p < leader + lead_repl_len) 1024 p = leader; 1025 else 1026 p -= lead_repl_len; 1027 #endif 1028 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len); 1029 if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len) 1030 p[lead_repl_len] = NUL; 1031 1032 /* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */ 1033 while (--p >= leader) 1034 { 1035 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1036 int l = mb_head_off(leader, p); 1037 1038 if (l > 1) 1039 { 1040 p -= l; 1041 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1) 1042 { 1043 p[1] = ' '; 1044 --l; 1045 } 1046 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1, 1047 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1))); 1048 lead_len -= l; 1049 *p = ' '; 1050 } 1051 else 1052 #endif 1053 if (!vim_iswhite(*p)) 1054 *p = ' '; 1055 } 1056 } 1057 else /* left adjusted leader */ 1058 { 1059 p = skipwhite(leader); 1060 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1061 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in 1062 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is 1063 * not to be overwritten. */ 1064 { 1065 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl, 1066 lead_repl_len); 1067 int i; 1068 int l; 1069 1070 for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l) 1071 { 1072 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i); 1073 if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size) 1074 break; 1075 } 1076 if (i != lead_repl_len) 1077 { 1078 mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i, 1079 (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p))); 1080 lead_len += lead_repl_len - i; 1081 } 1082 } 1083 #endif 1084 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len); 1085 1086 /* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old 1087 * leader by spaces. Keep Tabs, the indent must 1088 * remain the same. */ 1089 for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p) 1090 if (!vim_iswhite(*p)) 1091 { 1092 /* Don't put a space before a TAB. */ 1093 if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB) 1094 { 1095 --lead_len; 1096 mch_memmove(p, p + 1, 1097 (leader + lead_len) - p); 1098 } 1099 else 1100 { 1101 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1102 int l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p); 1103 1104 if (l > 1) 1105 { 1106 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1) 1107 { 1108 /* Replace a double-wide char with 1109 * two spaces */ 1110 --l; 1111 *p++ = ' '; 1112 } 1113 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l, 1114 (leader + lead_len) - p); 1115 lead_len -= l - 1; 1116 } 1117 #endif 1118 *p = ' '; 1119 } 1120 } 1121 *p = NUL; 1122 } 1123 1124 /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */ 1125 if (curbuf->b_p_ai 1126 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1127 || do_si 1128 #endif 1129 ) 1130 newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 1131 1132 /* Add the indent offset */ 1133 if (newindent + off < 0) 1134 { 1135 off = -newindent; 1136 newindent = 0; 1137 } 1138 else 1139 newindent += off; 1140 1141 /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that 1142 * alignment remains equal. */ 1143 while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0 1144 && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ') 1145 { 1146 /* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */ 1147 if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL) 1148 break; 1149 --lead_len; 1150 --off; 1151 } 1152 1153 /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an 1154 * extra space */ 1155 if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1])) 1156 extra_space = FALSE; 1157 leader[lead_len] = NUL; 1158 } 1159 1160 if (extra_space) 1161 { 1162 leader[lead_len++] = ' '; 1163 leader[lead_len] = NUL; 1164 } 1165 1166 newcol = lead_len; 1167 1168 /* 1169 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that 1170 * is in the comment leader 1171 */ 1172 if (newindent 1173 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1174 || did_si 1175 #endif 1176 ) 1177 { 1178 while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader)) 1179 { 1180 --lead_len; 1181 --newcol; 1182 ++leader; 1183 } 1184 } 1185 1186 } 1187 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1188 did_si = can_si = FALSE; 1189 #endif 1190 } 1191 else if (comment_end != NULL) 1192 { 1193 /* 1194 * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader. 1195 * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal 1196 * indent to align with the line containing the start of the 1197 * comment. 1198 */ 1199 if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' && 1200 (curbuf->b_p_ai 1201 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1202 || do_si 1203 #endif 1204 )) 1205 { 1206 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 1207 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line); 1208 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL) 1209 { 1210 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 1211 newindent = get_indent(); 1212 } 1213 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 1214 } 1215 } 1216 } 1217 #endif 1218 1219 /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */ 1220 if (p_extra != NULL) 1221 { 1222 *p_extra = saved_char; /* restore char that NUL replaced */ 1223 1224 /* 1225 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first 1226 * non-blank. 1227 * 1228 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack, 1229 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered. 1230 */ 1231 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1232 replace_push(NUL); /* end of extra blanks */ 1233 if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES)) 1234 { 1235 while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t') 1236 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1237 && (!enc_utf8 1238 || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1))) 1239 #endif 1240 ) 1241 { 1242 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1243 replace_push(*p_extra); 1244 ++p_extra; 1245 ++less_cols_off; 1246 } 1247 } 1248 if (*p_extra != NUL) 1249 did_ai = FALSE; /* append some text, don't truncate now */ 1250 1251 /* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */ 1252 less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line); 1253 } 1254 1255 if (p_extra == NULL) 1256 p_extra = (char_u *)""; /* append empty line */ 1257 1258 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1259 /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */ 1260 if (lead_len) 1261 { 1262 STRCAT(leader, p_extra); 1263 p_extra = leader; 1264 did_ai = TRUE; /* So truncating blanks works with comments */ 1265 less_cols -= lead_len; 1266 } 1267 else 1268 end_comment_pending = NUL; /* turns out there was no leader */ 1269 #endif 1270 1271 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 1272 if (dir == BACKWARD) 1273 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1274 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1275 if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count) 1276 #endif 1277 { 1278 if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE) 1279 == FAIL) 1280 goto theend; 1281 /* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding 1282 * with markers. */ 1283 mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L); 1284 did_append = TRUE; 1285 } 1286 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1287 else 1288 { 1289 /* 1290 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line. 1291 */ 1292 curwin->w_cursor.lnum++; 1293 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed) 1294 { 1295 /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL 1296 * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice. 1297 */ 1298 (void)u_save_cursor(); /* errors are ignored! */ 1299 vr_lines_changed++; 1300 } 1301 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE); 1302 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0); 1303 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 1304 did_append = FALSE; 1305 } 1306 #endif 1307 1308 if (newindent 1309 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1310 || did_si 1311 #endif 1312 ) 1313 { 1314 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1315 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1316 if (did_si) 1317 { 1318 if (p_sr) 1319 newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw; 1320 newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw; 1321 } 1322 #endif 1323 /* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */ 1324 if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et) 1325 { 1326 (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line); 1327 1328 /* 1329 * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing 1330 * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve 1331 * it. It gets restored at the function end. 1332 */ 1333 curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE; 1334 } 1335 else 1336 (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT); 1337 less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col; 1338 1339 ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 1340 1341 /* 1342 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must 1343 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS 1344 */ 1345 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1346 for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n) 1347 replace_push(NUL); 1348 newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col; 1349 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1350 if (no_si) 1351 did_si = FALSE; 1352 #endif 1353 } 1354 1355 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1356 /* 1357 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be 1358 * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS. 1359 */ 1360 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1361 while (lead_len-- > 0) 1362 replace_push(NUL); 1363 #endif 1364 1365 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 1366 1367 if (dir == FORWARD) 1368 { 1369 if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT)) 1370 { 1371 /* truncate current line at cursor */ 1372 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 1373 /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */ 1374 if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL)) 1375 truncate_spaces(saved_line); 1376 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE); 1377 saved_line = NULL; 1378 if (did_append) 1379 { 1380 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col, 1381 curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L); 1382 did_append = FALSE; 1383 1384 /* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */ 1385 if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX) 1386 mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1387 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off, 1388 1L, (long)-less_cols); 1389 } 1390 else 1391 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 1392 } 1393 1394 /* 1395 * Put the cursor on the new line. Careful: the scrollup() above may 1396 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor. 1397 */ 1398 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1; 1399 } 1400 if (did_append) 1401 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L); 1402 1403 curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol; 1404 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1405 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 1406 #endif 1407 1408 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 1409 /* 1410 * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop 1411 * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in 1412 * normal INSERT mode. 1413 */ 1414 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1415 { 1416 vreplace_mode = State; /* So we know to put things right later */ 1417 State = INSERT; 1418 } 1419 else 1420 vreplace_mode = 0; 1421 #endif 1422 #ifdef FEAT_LISP 1423 /* 1424 * May do lisp indenting. 1425 */ 1426 if (!p_paste 1427 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1428 && leader == NULL 1429 # endif 1430 && curbuf->b_p_lisp 1431 && curbuf->b_p_ai) 1432 { 1433 fixthisline(get_lisp_indent); 1434 p = ml_get_curline(); 1435 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p); 1436 } 1437 #endif 1438 #ifdef FEAT_CINDENT 1439 /* 1440 * May do indenting after opening a new line. 1441 */ 1442 if (!p_paste 1443 && (curbuf->b_p_cin 1444 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL 1445 || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL 1446 # endif 1447 ) 1448 && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD 1449 ? KEY_OPEN_FORW 1450 : KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))) 1451 { 1452 do_c_expr_indent(); 1453 p = ml_get_curline(); 1454 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p); 1455 } 1456 #endif 1457 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 1458 if (vreplace_mode != 0) 1459 State = vreplace_mode; 1460 #endif 1461 1462 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1463 /* 1464 * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the 1465 * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff 1466 * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()). 1467 */ 1468 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1469 { 1470 /* Put new line in p_extra */ 1471 p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline()); 1472 if (p_extra == NULL) 1473 goto theend; 1474 1475 /* Put back original line */ 1476 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE); 1477 1478 /* Insert new stuff into line again */ 1479 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 1480 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1481 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 1482 #endif 1483 ins_bytes(p_extra); /* will call changed_bytes() */ 1484 vim_free(p_extra); 1485 next_line = NULL; 1486 } 1487 #endif 1488 1489 retval = TRUE; /* success! */ 1490 theend: 1491 curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi; 1492 vim_free(saved_line); 1493 vim_free(next_line); 1494 vim_free(allocated); 1495 return retval; 1496 } 1497 1498 #if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO) 1499 /* 1500 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string 1501 * which introduces a comment. If this string is not a comment then 0 is 1502 * returned. 1503 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized 1504 * comment leader. 1505 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command. 1506 */ 1507 int 1508 get_leader_len(line, flags, backward) 1509 char_u *line; 1510 char_u **flags; 1511 int backward; 1512 { 1513 int i, j; 1514 int got_com = FALSE; 1515 int found_one; 1516 char_u part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* buffer for one option part */ 1517 char_u *string; /* pointer to comment string */ 1518 char_u *list; 1519 1520 i = 0; 1521 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) /* leading white space is ignored */ 1522 ++i; 1523 1524 /* 1525 * Repeat to match several nested comment strings. 1526 */ 1527 while (line[i]) 1528 { 1529 /* 1530 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match 1531 */ 1532 found_one = FALSE; 1533 for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; ) 1534 { 1535 /* 1536 * Get one option part into part_buf[]. Advance list to next one. 1537 * put string at start of string. 1538 */ 1539 if (!got_com && flags != NULL) /* remember where flags started */ 1540 *flags = list; 1541 (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 1542 string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':'); 1543 if (string == NULL) /* missing ':', ignore this part */ 1544 continue; 1545 *string++ = NUL; /* isolate flags from string */ 1546 1547 /* 1548 * When already found a nested comment, only accept further 1549 * nested comments. 1550 */ 1551 if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL) 1552 continue; 1553 1554 /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */ 1555 if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL) 1556 continue; 1557 1558 /* 1559 * Line contents and string must match. 1560 * When string starts with white space, must have some white space 1561 * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of 1562 * TABs and spaces). 1563 */ 1564 if (vim_iswhite(string[0])) 1565 { 1566 if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1])) 1567 continue; 1568 while (vim_iswhite(string[0])) 1569 ++string; 1570 } 1571 for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j) 1572 ; 1573 if (string[j] != NUL) 1574 continue; 1575 1576 /* 1577 * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an 1578 * end-of-line after the string in the line. 1579 */ 1580 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL 1581 && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL) 1582 continue; 1583 1584 /* 1585 * We have found a match, stop searching. 1586 */ 1587 i += j; 1588 got_com = TRUE; 1589 found_one = TRUE; 1590 break; 1591 } 1592 1593 /* 1594 * No match found, stop scanning. 1595 */ 1596 if (!found_one) 1597 break; 1598 1599 /* 1600 * Include any trailing white space. 1601 */ 1602 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) 1603 ++i; 1604 1605 /* 1606 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here. 1607 */ 1608 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL) 1609 break; 1610 } 1611 return (got_com ? i : 0); 1612 } 1613 #endif 1614 1615 /* 1616 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum". 1617 */ 1618 int 1619 plines(lnum) 1620 linenr_T lnum; 1621 { 1622 return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE); 1623 } 1624 1625 int 1626 plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight) 1627 win_T *wp; 1628 linenr_T lnum; 1629 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */ 1630 { 1631 #if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO) 1632 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result 1633 * is one line anyway. */ 1634 return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum); 1635 } 1636 1637 int 1638 plines_nofill(lnum) 1639 linenr_T lnum; 1640 { 1641 return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE); 1642 } 1643 1644 int 1645 plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) 1646 win_T *wp; 1647 linenr_T lnum; 1648 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */ 1649 { 1650 #endif 1651 int lines; 1652 1653 if (!wp->w_p_wrap) 1654 return 1; 1655 1656 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT 1657 if (wp->w_width == 0) 1658 return 1; 1659 #endif 1660 1661 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 1662 /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */ 1663 /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */ 1664 if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE) 1665 return 1; 1666 #endif 1667 1668 lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum); 1669 if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height) 1670 return (int)wp->w_height; 1671 return lines; 1672 } 1673 1674 /* 1675 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window 1676 * "wp". Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'. 1677 */ 1678 int 1679 plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum) 1680 win_T *wp; 1681 linenr_T lnum; 1682 { 1683 char_u *s; 1684 long col; 1685 int width; 1686 1687 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE); 1688 if (*s == NUL) /* empty line */ 1689 return 1; 1690 col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL); 1691 1692 /* 1693 * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one 1694 * extra column. 1695 */ 1696 if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL) 1697 col += 1; 1698 1699 /* 1700 * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'. 1701 */ 1702 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp); 1703 if (width <= 0) 1704 return 32000; 1705 if (col <= width) 1706 return 1; 1707 col -= width; 1708 width += win_col_off2(wp); 1709 return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1; 1710 } 1711 1712 /* 1713 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines 1714 * used from the start of the line to the given column number. 1715 */ 1716 int 1717 plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column) 1718 win_T *wp; 1719 linenr_T lnum; 1720 long column; 1721 { 1722 long col; 1723 char_u *s; 1724 int lines = 0; 1725 int width; 1726 1727 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 1728 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result 1729 * is one line anyway. */ 1730 lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum); 1731 #endif 1732 1733 if (!wp->w_p_wrap) 1734 return lines + 1; 1735 1736 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT 1737 if (wp->w_width == 0) 1738 return lines + 1; 1739 #endif 1740 1741 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE); 1742 1743 col = 0; 1744 while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0) 1745 { 1746 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL); 1747 mb_ptr_adv(s); 1748 } 1749 1750 /* 1751 * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in 1752 * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last 1753 * screen position of the TAB. This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps 1754 * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of 1755 * 'ts') -- webb. 1756 */ 1757 if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1)) 1758 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1; 1759 1760 /* 1761 * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc. 1762 */ 1763 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp); 1764 if (width > 0) 1765 { 1766 lines += 1; 1767 if (col >= width) 1768 lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp)); 1769 if (lines <= wp->w_height) 1770 return lines; 1771 } 1772 return (int)(wp->w_height); /* maximum length */ 1773 } 1774 1775 int 1776 plines_m_win(wp, first, last) 1777 win_T *wp; 1778 linenr_T first, last; 1779 { 1780 int count = 0; 1781 1782 while (first <= last) 1783 { 1784 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 1785 int x; 1786 1787 /* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines 1788 * that are maybe folded. */ 1789 x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL); 1790 if (x > 0) 1791 { 1792 ++count; /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */ 1793 first += x; 1794 } 1795 else 1796 #endif 1797 { 1798 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 1799 if (first == wp->w_topline) 1800 count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill; 1801 else 1802 #endif 1803 count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE); 1804 ++first; 1805 } 1806 } 1807 return (count); 1808 } 1809 1810 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO) 1811 /* 1812 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position. Stops at a NUL byte. 1813 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters. 1814 */ 1815 void 1816 ins_bytes(p) 1817 char_u *p; 1818 { 1819 ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p)); 1820 } 1821 #endif 1822 1823 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \ 1824 || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 1825 /* 1826 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position. 1827 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters. 1828 */ 1829 void 1830 ins_bytes_len(p, len) 1831 char_u *p; 1832 int len; 1833 { 1834 int i; 1835 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1836 int n; 1837 1838 for (i = 0; i < len; i += n) 1839 { 1840 n = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i); 1841 ins_char_bytes(p + i, n); 1842 } 1843 # else 1844 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) 1845 ins_char(p[i]); 1846 # endif 1847 } 1848 #endif 1849 1850 /* 1851 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position. 1852 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character. 1853 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 1854 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must 1855 * convert bytes to a character. 1856 */ 1857 void 1858 ins_char(c) 1859 int c; 1860 { 1861 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 1862 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES]; 1863 int n; 1864 1865 n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf); 1866 1867 /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte. 1868 * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */ 1869 if (buf[0] == 0) 1870 buf[0] = '\n'; 1871 1872 ins_char_bytes(buf, n); 1873 } 1874 1875 void 1876 ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen) 1877 char_u *buf; 1878 int charlen; 1879 { 1880 int c = buf[0]; 1881 int l, j; 1882 #endif 1883 int newlen; /* nr of bytes inserted */ 1884 int oldlen; /* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */ 1885 char_u *p; 1886 char_u *newp; 1887 char_u *oldp; 1888 int linelen; /* length of old line including NUL */ 1889 colnr_T col; 1890 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1891 int i; 1892 1893 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1894 /* Break tabs if needed. */ 1895 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0) 1896 coladvance_force(getviscol()); 1897 #endif 1898 1899 col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 1900 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 1901 linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1; 1902 1903 /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */ 1904 oldlen = 0; 1905 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1906 newlen = charlen; 1907 #else 1908 newlen = 1; 1909 #endif 1910 1911 if (State & REPLACE_FLAG) 1912 { 1913 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1914 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1915 { 1916 colnr_T new_vcol = 0; /* init for GCC */ 1917 colnr_T vcol; 1918 int old_list; 1919 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE 1920 char_u buf[2]; 1921 #endif 1922 1923 /* 1924 * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag. 1925 * Returns the old value of list, so when finished, 1926 * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this. 1927 */ 1928 old_list = curwin->w_p_list; 1929 if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL) 1930 curwin->w_p_list = FALSE; 1931 1932 /* 1933 * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more 1934 * characters (zero if it's a TAB). Count the number of bytes to 1935 * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen 1936 * cells. May result in adding spaces to fill a gap. 1937 */ 1938 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL); 1939 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE 1940 buf[0] = c; 1941 buf[1] = NUL; 1942 #endif 1943 new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol); 1944 while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol) 1945 { 1946 vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol); 1947 /* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right 1948 * position. */ 1949 if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB) 1950 break; 1951 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1952 oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + oldlen); 1953 #else 1954 ++oldlen; 1955 #endif 1956 /* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */ 1957 if (vcol > new_vcol) 1958 newlen += vcol - new_vcol; 1959 } 1960 curwin->w_p_list = old_list; 1961 } 1962 else 1963 #endif 1964 if (oldp[col] != NUL) 1965 { 1966 /* normal replace */ 1967 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1968 oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col); 1969 #else 1970 oldlen = 1; 1971 #endif 1972 } 1973 1974 1975 /* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be 1976 * put back when BS is used. The bytes of a multi-byte character are 1977 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off 1978 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */ 1979 replace_push(NUL); 1980 for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i) 1981 { 1982 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1983 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + i) - 1; 1984 for (j = l; j >= 0; --j) 1985 replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]); 1986 i += l; 1987 #else 1988 replace_push(oldp[col + i]); 1989 #endif 1990 } 1991 } 1992 1993 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen)); 1994 if (newp == NULL) 1995 return; 1996 1997 /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */ 1998 if (col > 0) 1999 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2000 2001 /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */ 2002 p = newp + col; 2003 mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen, 2004 (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen)); 2005 2006 /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */ 2007 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2008 mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen); 2009 i = charlen; 2010 #else 2011 *p = c; 2012 i = 1; 2013 #endif 2014 2015 /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */ 2016 while (i < newlen) 2017 p[i++] = ' '; 2018 2019 /* Replace the line in the buffer. */ 2020 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2021 2022 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2023 changed_bytes(lnum, col); 2024 2025 /* 2026 * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly 2027 * show the match for right parens and braces. 2028 */ 2029 if (p_sm && (State & INSERT) 2030 && msg_silent == 0 2031 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2032 && charlen == 1 2033 #endif 2034 #ifdef FEAT_INS_EXPAND 2035 && !ins_compl_active() 2036 #endif 2037 ) 2038 showmatch(c); 2039 2040 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT 2041 if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG)) 2042 #endif 2043 { 2044 /* Normal insert: move cursor right */ 2045 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2046 curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen; 2047 #else 2048 ++curwin->w_cursor.col; 2049 #endif 2050 } 2051 /* 2052 * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later. 2053 */ 2054 } 2055 2056 /* 2057 * Insert a string at the cursor position. 2058 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode. 2059 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2060 */ 2061 void 2062 ins_str(s) 2063 char_u *s; 2064 { 2065 char_u *oldp, *newp; 2066 int newlen = (int)STRLEN(s); 2067 int oldlen; 2068 colnr_T col; 2069 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2070 2071 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 2072 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0) 2073 coladvance_force(getviscol()); 2074 #endif 2075 2076 col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2077 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 2078 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp); 2079 2080 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1)); 2081 if (newp == NULL) 2082 return; 2083 if (col > 0) 2084 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2085 mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen); 2086 mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1)); 2087 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2088 changed_bytes(lnum, col); 2089 curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen; 2090 } 2091 2092 /* 2093 * Delete one character under the cursor. 2094 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line. 2095 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2096 * 2097 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2098 */ 2099 int 2100 del_char(fixpos) 2101 int fixpos; 2102 { 2103 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2104 if (has_mbyte) 2105 { 2106 /* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */ 2107 mb_adjust_cursor(); 2108 if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL) 2109 return FAIL; 2110 return del_chars(1L, fixpos); 2111 } 2112 #endif 2113 return del_bytes(1L, fixpos, TRUE); 2114 } 2115 2116 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 2117 /* 2118 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes. 2119 */ 2120 int 2121 del_chars(count, fixpos) 2122 long count; 2123 int fixpos; 2124 { 2125 long bytes = 0; 2126 long i; 2127 char_u *p; 2128 int l; 2129 2130 p = ml_get_cursor(); 2131 for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i) 2132 { 2133 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p); 2134 bytes += l; 2135 p += l; 2136 } 2137 return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos, TRUE); 2138 } 2139 #endif 2140 2141 /* 2142 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor. 2143 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line. 2144 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2145 * 2146 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2147 */ 2148 /*ARGSUSED*/ 2149 int 2150 del_bytes(count, fixpos_arg, use_delcombine) 2151 long count; 2152 int fixpos_arg; 2153 int use_delcombine; /* 'delcombine' option applies */ 2154 { 2155 char_u *oldp, *newp; 2156 colnr_T oldlen; 2157 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2158 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2159 int was_alloced; 2160 long movelen; 2161 int fixpos = fixpos_arg; 2162 2163 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 2164 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp); 2165 2166 /* 2167 * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line. 2168 */ 2169 if (col >= oldlen) 2170 return FAIL; 2171 2172 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2173 /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only 2174 * delete the last combining character. */ 2175 if (p_deco && use_delcombine && enc_utf8 2176 && utfc_ptr2len(oldp + col) >= count) 2177 { 2178 int cc[MAX_MCO]; 2179 int n; 2180 2181 (void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, cc); 2182 if (cc[0] != NUL) 2183 { 2184 /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */ 2185 n = col; 2186 do 2187 { 2188 col = n; 2189 count = utf_ptr2len(oldp + n); 2190 n += count; 2191 } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n)); 2192 fixpos = 0; 2193 } 2194 } 2195 #endif 2196 2197 /* 2198 * When count is too big, reduce it. 2199 */ 2200 movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */ 2201 if (movelen <= 1) 2202 { 2203 /* 2204 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and 2205 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL, 2206 * unless "restart_edit" is set or 'virtualedit' contains "onemore". 2207 */ 2208 if (col > 0 && fixpos && restart_edit == 0 2209 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 2210 && (ve_flags & VE_ONEMORE) == 0 2211 #endif 2212 ) 2213 { 2214 --curwin->w_cursor.col; 2215 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 2216 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 2217 #endif 2218 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2219 if (has_mbyte) 2220 curwin->w_cursor.col -= 2221 (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col); 2222 #endif 2223 } 2224 count = oldlen - col; 2225 movelen = 1; 2226 } 2227 2228 /* 2229 * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the 2230 * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated 2231 */ 2232 was_alloced = ml_line_alloced(); /* check if oldp was allocated */ 2233 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG 2234 if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans) 2235 netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count); 2236 /* else is handled by ml_replace() */ 2237 #endif 2238 if (was_alloced) 2239 newp = oldp; /* use same allocated memory */ 2240 else 2241 { /* need to allocate a new line */ 2242 newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count)); 2243 if (newp == NULL) 2244 return FAIL; 2245 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2246 } 2247 mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen); 2248 if (!was_alloced) 2249 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2250 2251 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2252 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 2253 2254 return OK; 2255 } 2256 2257 /* 2258 * Delete from cursor to end of line. 2259 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2260 * 2261 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2262 */ 2263 int 2264 truncate_line(fixpos) 2265 int fixpos; /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */ 2266 { 2267 char_u *newp; 2268 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2269 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2270 2271 if (col == 0) 2272 newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)""); 2273 else 2274 newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col); 2275 2276 if (newp == NULL) 2277 return FAIL; 2278 2279 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2280 2281 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2282 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 2283 2284 /* 2285 * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL. 2286 */ 2287 if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0) 2288 --curwin->w_cursor.col; 2289 2290 return OK; 2291 } 2292 2293 /* 2294 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor. 2295 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE. 2296 */ 2297 void 2298 del_lines(nlines, undo) 2299 long nlines; /* number of lines to delete */ 2300 int undo; /* if TRUE, prepare for undo */ 2301 { 2302 long n; 2303 2304 if (nlines <= 0) 2305 return; 2306 2307 /* save the deleted lines for undo */ 2308 if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL) 2309 return; 2310 2311 for (n = 0; n < nlines; ) 2312 { 2313 if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY) /* nothing to delete */ 2314 break; 2315 2316 ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE); 2317 ++n; 2318 2319 /* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */ 2320 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 2321 break; 2322 } 2323 /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2324 deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n); 2325 2326 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 2327 check_cursor_lnum(); 2328 } 2329 2330 int 2331 gchar_pos(pos) 2332 pos_T *pos; 2333 { 2334 char_u *ptr = ml_get_pos(pos); 2335 2336 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2337 if (has_mbyte) 2338 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr); 2339 #endif 2340 return (int)*ptr; 2341 } 2342 2343 int 2344 gchar_cursor() 2345 { 2346 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2347 if (has_mbyte) 2348 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor()); 2349 #endif 2350 return (int)*ml_get_cursor(); 2351 } 2352 2353 /* 2354 * Write a character at the current cursor position. 2355 * It is directly written into the block. 2356 */ 2357 void 2358 pchar_cursor(c) 2359 int c; 2360 { 2361 *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE) 2362 + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c; 2363 } 2364 2365 #if 0 /* not used */ 2366 /* 2367 * Put *pos at end of current buffer 2368 */ 2369 void 2370 goto_endofbuf(pos) 2371 pos_T *pos; 2372 { 2373 char_u *p; 2374 2375 pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count; 2376 pos->col = 0; 2377 p = ml_get(pos->lnum); 2378 while (*p++) 2379 ++pos->col; 2380 } 2381 #endif 2382 2383 /* 2384 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first 2385 * non-blank in the line. 2386 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in 2387 * the line. 2388 */ 2389 int 2390 inindent(extra) 2391 int extra; 2392 { 2393 char_u *ptr; 2394 colnr_T col; 2395 2396 for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col) 2397 ++ptr; 2398 if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra) 2399 return TRUE; 2400 else 2401 return FALSE; 2402 } 2403 2404 /* 2405 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma. 2406 */ 2407 char_u * 2408 skip_to_option_part(p) 2409 char_u *p; 2410 { 2411 if (*p == ',') 2412 ++p; 2413 while (*p == ' ') 2414 ++p; 2415 return p; 2416 } 2417 2418 /* 2419 * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed. 2420 * 2421 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also 2422 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn. 2423 */ 2424 void 2425 changed() 2426 { 2427 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) 2428 /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't 2429 * mean a change of the buffer yet. That is delayed until the 2430 * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */ 2431 if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting) 2432 return; 2433 xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE; 2434 #endif 2435 2436 if (!curbuf->b_changed) 2437 { 2438 int save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll; 2439 2440 change_warning(0); 2441 /* Create a swap file if that is wanted. 2442 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */ 2443 if (curbuf->b_may_swap 2444 #ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX 2445 && !bt_dontwrite(curbuf) 2446 #endif 2447 ) 2448 { 2449 ml_open_file(curbuf); 2450 2451 /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message. 2452 * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected 2453 * message. Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now, 2454 * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */ 2455 if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0) 2456 { 2457 out_flush(); 2458 ui_delay(2000L, TRUE); 2459 wait_return(TRUE); 2460 msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll; 2461 } 2462 } 2463 curbuf->b_changed = TRUE; 2464 ml_setflags(curbuf); 2465 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS 2466 check_status(curbuf); 2467 redraw_tabline = TRUE; 2468 #endif 2469 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE 2470 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */ 2471 #endif 2472 } 2473 ++curbuf->b_changedtick; 2474 } 2475 2476 static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum)); 2477 static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra)); 2478 static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra)); 2479 2480 /* 2481 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer. 2482 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed 2483 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed() 2484 * - invalidates cached values 2485 */ 2486 void 2487 changed_bytes(lnum, col) 2488 linenr_T lnum; 2489 colnr_T col; 2490 { 2491 changedOneline(curbuf, lnum); 2492 changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L); 2493 2494 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 2495 /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */ 2496 if (curwin->w_p_diff) 2497 { 2498 win_T *wp; 2499 linenr_T wlnum; 2500 2501 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2502 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin) 2503 { 2504 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID); 2505 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp); 2506 if (wlnum > 0) 2507 changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum); 2508 } 2509 } 2510 #endif 2511 } 2512 2513 static void 2514 changedOneline(buf, lnum) 2515 buf_T *buf; 2516 linenr_T lnum; 2517 { 2518 if (buf->b_mod_set) 2519 { 2520 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */ 2521 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top) 2522 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2523 else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot) 2524 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1; 2525 } 2526 else 2527 { 2528 /* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */ 2529 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE; 2530 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2531 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1; 2532 buf->b_mod_xlines = 0; 2533 } 2534 } 2535 2536 /* 2537 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer. 2538 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2539 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag. 2540 */ 2541 void 2542 appended_lines(lnum, count) 2543 linenr_T lnum; 2544 long count; 2545 { 2546 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count); 2547 } 2548 2549 /* 2550 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first. 2551 */ 2552 void 2553 appended_lines_mark(lnum, count) 2554 linenr_T lnum; 2555 long count; 2556 { 2557 mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L); 2558 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count); 2559 } 2560 2561 /* 2562 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer. 2563 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2564 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag. 2565 */ 2566 void 2567 deleted_lines(lnum, count) 2568 linenr_T lnum; 2569 long count; 2570 { 2571 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count); 2572 } 2573 2574 /* 2575 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first. 2576 */ 2577 void 2578 deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count) 2579 linenr_T lnum; 2580 long count; 2581 { 2582 mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count); 2583 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count); 2584 } 2585 2586 /* 2587 * Changed lines for the current buffer. 2588 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2589 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed() 2590 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed 2591 * - invalidate cached values 2592 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line 2593 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change). 2594 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal. 2595 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*. 2596 */ 2597 void 2598 changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra) 2599 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */ 2600 colnr_T col; /* column in first line with change */ 2601 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */ 2602 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */ 2603 { 2604 changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra); 2605 2606 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 2607 if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff) 2608 { 2609 /* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't 2610 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for 2611 * displaying. */ 2612 win_T *wp; 2613 linenr_T wlnum; 2614 2615 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2616 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin) 2617 { 2618 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID); 2619 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp); 2620 if (wlnum > 0) 2621 changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum, 2622 lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L); 2623 } 2624 } 2625 #endif 2626 2627 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra); 2628 } 2629 2630 static void 2631 changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra) 2632 buf_T *buf; 2633 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */ 2634 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */ 2635 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */ 2636 { 2637 if (buf->b_mod_set) 2638 { 2639 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */ 2640 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top) 2641 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2642 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot) 2643 { 2644 /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */ 2645 buf->b_mod_bot += xtra; 2646 if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum) 2647 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum; 2648 } 2649 if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot) 2650 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra; 2651 buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra; 2652 } 2653 else 2654 { 2655 /* set the area that must be redisplayed */ 2656 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE; 2657 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2658 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra; 2659 buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra; 2660 } 2661 } 2662 2663 static void 2664 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra) 2665 linenr_T lnum; 2666 colnr_T col; 2667 linenr_T lnume; 2668 long xtra; 2669 { 2670 win_T *wp; 2671 int i; 2672 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST 2673 int cols; 2674 pos_T *p; 2675 int add; 2676 #endif 2677 2678 /* mark the buffer as modified */ 2679 changed(); 2680 2681 /* set the '. mark */ 2682 if (!cmdmod.keepjumps) 2683 { 2684 curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum; 2685 curbuf->b_last_change.col = col; 2686 2687 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST 2688 /* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we 2689 * don't have an entry yet. */ 2690 if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0) 2691 { 2692 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0) 2693 add = TRUE; 2694 else 2695 { 2696 /* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same 2697 * as the last one and the column is not too far away. Avoids 2698 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */ 2699 p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1]; 2700 if (p->lnum != lnum) 2701 add = TRUE; 2702 else 2703 { 2704 cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE); 2705 if (cols == 0) 2706 cols = 79; 2707 add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col); 2708 } 2709 } 2710 if (add) 2711 { 2712 /* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes 2713 * and it's at some distance of the last change. Use a new 2714 * position in the changelist. */ 2715 curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE; 2716 2717 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE) 2718 { 2719 /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */ 2720 curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1; 2721 mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1, 2722 sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1)); 2723 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) 2724 { 2725 /* Correct position in changelist for other windows on 2726 * this buffer. */ 2727 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0) 2728 --wp->w_changelistidx; 2729 } 2730 } 2731 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) 2732 { 2733 /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is 2734 * at the end it stays at the end. */ 2735 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf 2736 && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen) 2737 ++wp->w_changelistidx; 2738 } 2739 ++curbuf->b_changelistlen; 2740 } 2741 } 2742 curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] = 2743 curbuf->b_last_change; 2744 /* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g," 2745 * takes you back to it. */ 2746 curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen; 2747 #endif 2748 } 2749 2750 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) 2751 { 2752 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf) 2753 { 2754 /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */ 2755 if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID) 2756 wp->w_redr_type = VALID; 2757 2758 /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached 2759 * values for the cursor. */ 2760 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2761 /* 2762 * Update the folds for this window. Can't postpone this, because 2763 * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd". 2764 */ 2765 foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1); 2766 2767 /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become 2768 * included in a fold. Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that 2769 * might be displayed differently. 2770 * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when 2771 * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */ 2772 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL); 2773 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum) 2774 wp->w_cline_folded = i; 2775 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL); 2776 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume) 2777 wp->w_cline_folded = i; 2778 2779 /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines, 2780 * compare with the first line in that range. */ 2781 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum) 2782 { 2783 i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum); 2784 if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum) 2785 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp); 2786 } 2787 #endif 2788 2789 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum) 2790 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp); 2791 else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col) 2792 changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp); 2793 if (wp->w_botline >= lnum) 2794 { 2795 /* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make 2796 * other lines scroll down below botline). */ 2797 approximate_botline_win(wp); 2798 } 2799 2800 /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid. 2801 * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for 2802 * inserted/deleted lines. Makes it possible to stop displaying 2803 * after the change. */ 2804 for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i) 2805 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid) 2806 { 2807 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum) 2808 { 2809 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume) 2810 { 2811 /* line included in change */ 2812 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE; 2813 } 2814 else if (xtra != 0) 2815 { 2816 /* line below change */ 2817 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra; 2818 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2819 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra; 2820 #endif 2821 } 2822 } 2823 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2824 else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum) 2825 { 2826 /* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines, 2827 * may need to be redrawn */ 2828 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE; 2829 } 2830 #endif 2831 } 2832 } 2833 } 2834 2835 /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn, 2836 * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */ 2837 if (must_redraw < VALID) 2838 must_redraw = VALID; 2839 2840 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD 2841 /* when the cursor line is changed always trigger CursorMoved */ 2842 if (lnum <= curwin->w_cursor.lnum && lnume > curwin->w_cursor.lnum) 2843 last_cursormoved.lnum = 0; 2844 #endif 2845 } 2846 2847 /* 2848 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf' 2849 */ 2850 void 2851 unchanged(buf, ff) 2852 buf_T *buf; 2853 int ff; /* also reset 'fileformat' */ 2854 { 2855 if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf))) 2856 { 2857 buf->b_changed = 0; 2858 ml_setflags(buf); 2859 if (ff) 2860 save_file_ff(buf); 2861 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS 2862 check_status(buf); 2863 redraw_tabline = TRUE; 2864 #endif 2865 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE 2866 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */ 2867 #endif 2868 } 2869 ++buf->b_changedtick; 2870 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG 2871 netbeans_unmodified(buf); 2872 #endif 2873 } 2874 2875 #if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO) 2876 /* 2877 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf' 2878 * need to be updated 2879 */ 2880 void 2881 check_status(buf) 2882 buf_T *buf; 2883 { 2884 win_T *wp; 2885 2886 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2887 if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height) 2888 { 2889 wp->w_redr_status = TRUE; 2890 if (must_redraw < VALID) 2891 must_redraw = VALID; 2892 } 2893 } 2894 #endif 2895 2896 /* 2897 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change. 2898 * Don't do this for autocommands. 2899 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer. 2900 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but "b_did_warn" 2901 * will be TRUE. 2902 */ 2903 void 2904 change_warning(col) 2905 int col; /* column for message; non-zero when in insert 2906 mode and 'showmode' is on */ 2907 { 2908 if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE 2909 && curbufIsChanged() == 0 2910 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD 2911 && !autocmd_busy 2912 #endif 2913 && curbuf->b_p_ro) 2914 { 2915 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD 2916 apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf); 2917 if (!curbuf->b_p_ro) 2918 return; 2919 #endif 2920 /* 2921 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should 2922 * be after the mode message. 2923 */ 2924 msg_start(); 2925 if (msg_row == Rows - 1) 2926 msg_col = col; 2927 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W)); 2928 MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"), 2929 hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST); 2930 msg_clr_eos(); 2931 (void)msg_end(); 2932 if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode) 2933 { 2934 out_flush(); 2935 ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */ 2936 } 2937 curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE; 2938 redraw_cmdline = FALSE; /* don't redraw and erase the message */ 2939 if (msg_row < Rows - 1) 2940 showmode(); 2941 } 2942 } 2943 2944 /* 2945 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'. 2946 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid 2947 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit. 2948 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters 2949 * from any buffers but directly from the user. 2950 * 2951 * return the 'y' or 'n' 2952 */ 2953 int 2954 ask_yesno(str, direct) 2955 char_u *str; 2956 int direct; 2957 { 2958 int r = ' '; 2959 int save_State = State; 2960 2961 if (exiting) /* put terminal in raw mode for this question */ 2962 settmode(TMODE_RAW); 2963 ++no_wait_return; 2964 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL 2965 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */ 2966 #endif 2967 State = CONFIRM; /* mouse behaves like with :confirm */ 2968 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 2969 setmouse(); /* disables mouse for xterm */ 2970 #endif 2971 ++no_mapping; 2972 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */ 2973 2974 while (r != 'y' && r != 'n') 2975 { 2976 /* same highlighting as for wait_return */ 2977 smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str); 2978 if (direct) 2979 r = get_keystroke(); 2980 else 2981 r = safe_vgetc(); 2982 if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC) 2983 r = 'n'; 2984 msg_putchar(r); /* show what you typed */ 2985 out_flush(); 2986 } 2987 --no_wait_return; 2988 State = save_State; 2989 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 2990 setmouse(); 2991 #endif 2992 --no_mapping; 2993 --allow_keys; 2994 2995 return r; 2996 } 2997 2998 /* 2999 * Get a key stroke directly from the user. 3000 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left 3001 * button (used at the more prompt). 3002 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters. 3003 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored. 3004 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC. 3005 */ 3006 int 3007 get_keystroke() 3008 { 3009 #define CBUFLEN 151 3010 char_u buf[CBUFLEN]; 3011 int len = 0; 3012 int n; 3013 int save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c; 3014 3015 mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE; /* mappings are not used here */ 3016 for (;;) 3017 { 3018 cursor_on(); 3019 out_flush(); 3020 3021 /* First time: blocking wait. Second time: wait up to 100ms for a 3022 * terminal code to complete. Leave some room for check_termcode() to 3023 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL). And 3024 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */ 3025 n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3, 3026 len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0); 3027 if (n > 0) 3028 { 3029 /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */ 3030 n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE); 3031 len += n; 3032 } 3033 3034 /* incomplete termcode: get more characters */ 3035 if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0) 3036 continue; 3037 /* found a termcode: adjust length */ 3038 if (n > 0) 3039 len = n; 3040 if (len == 0) /* nothing typed yet */ 3041 continue; 3042 3043 /* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */ 3044 n = buf[0]; 3045 if (n == K_SPECIAL) 3046 { 3047 n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]); 3048 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER 3049 || n == K_IGNORE 3050 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 3051 || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM 3052 || n == K_LEFTDRAG 3053 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE 3054 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM 3055 || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE 3056 || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG 3057 || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE 3058 || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE 3059 || n == K_RIGHTDRAG 3060 || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE 3061 || n == K_MOUSEDOWN 3062 || n == K_MOUSEUP 3063 || n == K_X1MOUSE 3064 || n == K_X1DRAG 3065 || n == K_X1RELEASE 3066 || n == K_X2MOUSE 3067 || n == K_X2DRAG 3068 || n == K_X2RELEASE 3069 # ifdef FEAT_GUI 3070 || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR 3071 || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR 3072 # endif 3073 #endif 3074 ) 3075 { 3076 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER) 3077 mod_mask = buf[2]; 3078 len -= 3; 3079 if (len > 0) 3080 mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len); 3081 continue; 3082 } 3083 } 3084 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 3085 if (has_mbyte) 3086 { 3087 if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len) 3088 continue; /* more bytes to get */ 3089 buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL; 3090 n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf); 3091 } 3092 #endif 3093 #ifdef UNIX 3094 if (n == intr_char) 3095 n = ESC; 3096 #endif 3097 break; 3098 } 3099 3100 mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c; 3101 return n; 3102 } 3103 3104 /* 3105 * Get a number from the user. 3106 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse. 3107 */ 3108 int 3109 get_number(colon, mouse_used) 3110 int colon; /* allow colon to abort */ 3111 int *mouse_used; 3112 { 3113 int n = 0; 3114 int c; 3115 3116 if (mouse_used != NULL) 3117 *mouse_used = FALSE; 3118 3119 /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a 3120 * zero (as if CR was hit). */ 3121 if (msg_silent != 0) 3122 return 0; 3123 3124 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL 3125 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */ 3126 #endif 3127 ++no_mapping; 3128 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */ 3129 for (;;) 3130 { 3131 windgoto(msg_row, msg_col); 3132 c = safe_vgetc(); 3133 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c)) 3134 { 3135 n = n * 10 + c - '0'; 3136 msg_putchar(c); 3137 } 3138 else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H) 3139 { 3140 n /= 10; 3141 MSG_PUTS("\b \b"); 3142 } 3143 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 3144 else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE) 3145 { 3146 *mouse_used = TRUE; 3147 n = mouse_row + 1; 3148 break; 3149 } 3150 #endif 3151 else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon) 3152 { 3153 stuffcharReadbuff(':'); 3154 if (!exmode_active) 3155 cmdline_row = msg_row; 3156 skip_redraw = TRUE; /* skip redraw once */ 3157 do_redraw = FALSE; 3158 break; 3159 } 3160 else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC) 3161 break; 3162 } 3163 --no_mapping; 3164 --allow_keys; 3165 return n; 3166 } 3167 3168 /* 3169 * Ask the user to enter a number. 3170 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return 3171 * the line number. 3172 */ 3173 int 3174 prompt_for_number(mouse_used) 3175 int *mouse_used; 3176 { 3177 int i; 3178 int save_cmdline_row; 3179 int save_State; 3180 3181 /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */ 3182 if (mouse_used != NULL) 3183 MSG_PUTS(_("Type number or click with mouse (<Enter> cancels): ")); 3184 else 3185 MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): ")); 3186 3187 /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted. */ 3188 save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row; 3189 cmdline_row = Rows - 1; 3190 save_State = State; 3191 if (mouse_used == NULL) 3192 State = CMDLINE; 3193 else 3194 State = NORMAL; 3195 3196 i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used); 3197 if (KeyTyped) 3198 { 3199 /* don't call wait_return() now */ 3200 /* msg_putchar('\n'); */ 3201 cmdline_row = msg_row - 1; 3202 need_wait_return = FALSE; 3203 msg_didany = FALSE; 3204 } 3205 else 3206 cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row; 3207 State = save_State; 3208 3209 return i; 3210 } 3211 3212 void 3213 msgmore(n) 3214 long n; 3215 { 3216 long pn; 3217 3218 if (global_busy /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */ 3219 || !messaging()) /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */ 3220 return; 3221 3222 /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite 3223 * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and 3224 * then "put" reports the last action. */ 3225 if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more) 3226 return; 3227 3228 if (n > 0) 3229 pn = n; 3230 else 3231 pn = -n; 3232 3233 if (pn > p_report) 3234 { 3235 if (pn == 1) 3236 { 3237 if (n > 0) 3238 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line")); 3239 else 3240 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less")); 3241 } 3242 else 3243 { 3244 if (n > 0) 3245 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn); 3246 else 3247 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn); 3248 } 3249 if (got_int) 3250 STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)")); 3251 if (msg(msg_buf)) 3252 { 3253 set_keep_msg(msg_buf, 0); 3254 keep_msg_more = TRUE; 3255 } 3256 } 3257 } 3258 3259 /* 3260 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error 3261 */ 3262 void 3263 beep_flush() 3264 { 3265 if (emsg_silent == 0) 3266 { 3267 flush_buffers(FALSE); 3268 vim_beep(); 3269 } 3270 } 3271 3272 /* 3273 * give a warning for an error 3274 */ 3275 void 3276 vim_beep() 3277 { 3278 if (emsg_silent == 0) 3279 { 3280 if (p_vb 3281 #ifdef FEAT_GUI 3282 /* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI 3283 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */ 3284 && !(gui.in_use && gui.starting) 3285 #endif 3286 ) 3287 { 3288 out_str(T_VB); 3289 } 3290 else 3291 { 3292 #ifdef MSDOS 3293 /* 3294 * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait 3295 * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems 3296 * where the beeps don't overlap. 3297 */ 3298 if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10) 3299 { 3300 out_char(BELL); 3301 beep_count = 1; 3302 } 3303 else 3304 ++beep_count; 3305 #else 3306 out_char(BELL); 3307 #endif 3308 } 3309 3310 /* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a 3311 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */ 3312 if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL) 3313 { 3314 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W)); 3315 msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W)); 3316 } 3317 } 3318 } 3319 3320 /* 3321 * To get the "real" home directory: 3322 * - get value of $HOME 3323 * For Unix: 3324 * - go to that directory 3325 * - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory. 3326 * This also works with mounts and links. 3327 * Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive. 3328 */ 3329 static char_u *homedir = NULL; 3330 3331 void 3332 init_homedir() 3333 { 3334 char_u *var; 3335 3336 /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */ 3337 vim_free(homedir); 3338 homedir = NULL; 3339 3340 #ifdef VMS 3341 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN"); 3342 #else 3343 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME"); 3344 #endif 3345 3346 if (var != NULL && *var == NUL) /* empty is same as not set */ 3347 var = NULL; 3348 3349 #ifdef WIN3264 3350 /* 3351 * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another 3352 * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%". Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set 3353 * when $HOME is being set. 3354 */ 3355 if (var != NULL && *var == '%') 3356 { 3357 char_u *p; 3358 char_u *exp; 3359 3360 p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%'); 3361 if (p != NULL) 3362 { 3363 vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1)); 3364 exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff); 3365 if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL 3366 && STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL) 3367 { 3368 vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1); 3369 var = NameBuff; 3370 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */ 3371 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff); 3372 } 3373 } 3374 } 3375 3376 /* 3377 * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has 3378 * specifically defined it for Vim's sake. However, on Windows NT 3379 * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for 3380 * each user. Try constructing $HOME from these. 3381 */ 3382 if (var == NULL) 3383 { 3384 char_u *homedrive, *homepath; 3385 3386 homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE"); 3387 homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH"); 3388 if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL 3389 && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL) 3390 { 3391 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath); 3392 if (NameBuff[0] != NUL) 3393 { 3394 var = NameBuff; 3395 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */ 3396 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff); 3397 } 3398 } 3399 } 3400 3401 # if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) 3402 if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL) 3403 { 3404 int len; 3405 char_u *pp; 3406 3407 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are 3408 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */ 3409 acp_to_enc(var, STRLEN(var), &pp, &len); 3410 if (pp != NULL) 3411 { 3412 homedir = pp; 3413 return; 3414 } 3415 } 3416 # endif 3417 #endif 3418 3419 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) 3420 /* 3421 * Default home dir is C:/ 3422 * Best assumption we can make in such a situation. 3423 */ 3424 if (var == NULL) 3425 var = "C:/"; 3426 #endif 3427 if (var != NULL) 3428 { 3429 #ifdef UNIX 3430 /* 3431 * Change to the directory and get the actual path. This resolves 3432 * links. Don't do it when we can't return. 3433 */ 3434 if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK 3435 && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0) 3436 { 3437 if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK) 3438 var = IObuff; 3439 if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0) 3440 EMSG(_(e_prev_dir)); 3441 } 3442 #endif 3443 homedir = vim_strsave(var); 3444 } 3445 } 3446 3447 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO) 3448 void 3449 free_homedir() 3450 { 3451 vim_free(homedir); 3452 } 3453 #endif 3454 3455 /* 3456 * Expand environment variable with path name. 3457 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME. For Unix "~user/" is expanded. 3458 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$". 3459 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src. 3460 */ 3461 void 3462 expand_env(src, dst, dstlen) 3463 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */ 3464 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 3465 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 3466 { 3467 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, NULL); 3468 } 3469 3470 void 3471 expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, startstr) 3472 char_u *srcp; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */ 3473 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 3474 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 3475 int esc; /* escape spaces in expanded variables */ 3476 char_u *startstr; /* start again after this (can be NULL) */ 3477 { 3478 char_u *src; 3479 char_u *tail; 3480 int c; 3481 char_u *var; 3482 int copy_char; 3483 int mustfree; /* var was allocated, need to free it later */ 3484 int at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */ 3485 int startstr_len = 0; 3486 3487 if (startstr != NULL) 3488 startstr_len = STRLEN(startstr); 3489 3490 src = skipwhite(srcp); 3491 --dstlen; /* leave one char space for "\," */ 3492 while (*src && dstlen > 0) 3493 { 3494 copy_char = TRUE; 3495 if ((*src == '$' 3496 #ifdef VMS 3497 && at_start 3498 #endif 3499 ) 3500 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 3501 || *src == '%' 3502 #endif 3503 || (*src == '~' && at_start)) 3504 { 3505 mustfree = FALSE; 3506 3507 /* 3508 * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may 3509 * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended. 3510 */ 3511 if (*src != '~') /* environment var */ 3512 { 3513 tail = src + 1; 3514 var = dst; 3515 c = dstlen - 1; 3516 3517 #ifdef UNIX 3518 /* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */ 3519 if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{')) 3520 { 3521 tail++; /* ignore '{' */ 3522 while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}') 3523 *var++ = *tail++; 3524 } 3525 else 3526 #endif 3527 { 3528 while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail)) 3529 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 3530 || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%') 3531 #endif 3532 )) 3533 { 3534 #ifdef OS2 /* env vars only in uppercase */ 3535 *var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail); 3536 tail++; /* toupper() may be a macro! */ 3537 #else 3538 *var++ = *tail++; 3539 #endif 3540 } 3541 } 3542 3543 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX) 3544 # ifdef UNIX 3545 if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}') 3546 # else 3547 if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%') 3548 # endif 3549 var = NULL; 3550 else 3551 { 3552 # ifdef UNIX 3553 if (src[1] == '{') 3554 # else 3555 if (*src == '%') 3556 #endif 3557 ++tail; 3558 #endif 3559 *var = NUL; 3560 var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree); 3561 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX) 3562 } 3563 #endif 3564 } 3565 /* home directory */ 3566 else if ( src[1] == NUL 3567 || vim_ispathsep(src[1]) 3568 || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL) 3569 { 3570 var = homedir; 3571 tail = src + 1; 3572 } 3573 else /* user directory */ 3574 { 3575 #if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME)) 3576 /* 3577 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it. 3578 */ 3579 tail = src; 3580 var = dst; 3581 c = dstlen - 1; 3582 while ( c-- > 0 3583 && *tail 3584 && vim_isfilec(*tail) 3585 && !vim_ispathsep(*tail)) 3586 *var++ = *tail++; 3587 *var = NUL; 3588 # ifdef UNIX 3589 /* 3590 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it. 3591 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to 3592 * expand ~user. This is slower and may fail if the shell 3593 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh). 3594 */ 3595 # if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H) 3596 { 3597 struct passwd *pw; 3598 3599 /* Note: memory allocated by getpwnam() is never freed. 3600 * Calling endpwent() apparently doesn't help. */ 3601 pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1); 3602 if (pw != NULL) 3603 var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir; 3604 else 3605 var = NULL; 3606 } 3607 if (var == NULL) 3608 # endif 3609 { 3610 expand_T xpc; 3611 3612 ExpandInit(&xpc); 3613 xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES; 3614 var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL, 3615 WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE); 3616 ExpandCleanup(&xpc); 3617 mustfree = TRUE; 3618 } 3619 3620 # else /* !UNIX, thus VMS */ 3621 /* 3622 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of 3623 * directories to search for the user account in. 3624 */ 3625 { 3626 char_u test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL]; 3627 char_u *path, *next_path, *ptr; 3628 struct stat st; 3629 3630 STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME); 3631 next_path = paths; 3632 while (*next_path) 3633 { 3634 for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ','; 3635 next_path++); 3636 if (*next_path) 3637 *next_path++ = NUL; 3638 STRCPY(test, path); 3639 STRCAT(test, "/"); 3640 STRCAT(test, dst + 1); 3641 if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0) 3642 { 3643 var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1); 3644 STRCPY(var, test); 3645 mustfree = TRUE; 3646 break; 3647 } 3648 } 3649 } 3650 # endif /* UNIX */ 3651 #else 3652 /* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */ 3653 var = NULL; 3654 tail = (char_u *)""; /* for gcc */ 3655 #endif /* UNIX || VMS */ 3656 } 3657 3658 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 3659 /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes. 3660 * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */ 3661 if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL) 3662 { 3663 char_u *p = vim_strsave(var); 3664 3665 if (p != NULL) 3666 { 3667 if (mustfree) 3668 vim_free(var); 3669 var = p; 3670 mustfree = TRUE; 3671 forward_slash(var); 3672 } 3673 } 3674 #endif 3675 3676 /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash. 3677 * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */ 3678 if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL) 3679 { 3680 char_u *p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t"); 3681 3682 if (p != NULL) 3683 { 3684 if (mustfree) 3685 vim_free(var); 3686 var = p; 3687 mustfree = TRUE; 3688 } 3689 } 3690 3691 if (var != NULL && *var != NUL 3692 && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen)) 3693 { 3694 STRCPY(dst, var); 3695 dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var); 3696 c = STRLEN(var); 3697 /* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts 3698 * with it, skip a character */ 3699 if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c) 3700 #if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA) 3701 && dst[-1] != ':' 3702 #endif 3703 && vim_ispathsep(*tail)) 3704 ++tail; 3705 dst += c; 3706 src = tail; 3707 copy_char = FALSE; 3708 } 3709 if (mustfree) 3710 vim_free(var); 3711 } 3712 3713 if (copy_char) /* copy at least one char */ 3714 { 3715 /* 3716 * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'. 3717 */ 3718 at_start = FALSE; 3719 if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL) 3720 { 3721 *dst++ = *src++; 3722 --dstlen; 3723 } 3724 else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',') 3725 at_start = TRUE; 3726 *dst++ = *src++; 3727 --dstlen; 3728 3729 if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp 3730 && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0) 3731 at_start = TRUE; 3732 } 3733 } 3734 *dst = NUL; 3735 } 3736 3737 /* 3738 * Vim's version of getenv(). 3739 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME. 3740 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32. 3741 */ 3742 char_u * 3743 vim_getenv(name, mustfree) 3744 char_u *name; 3745 int *mustfree; /* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */ 3746 { 3747 char_u *p; 3748 char_u *pend; 3749 int vimruntime; 3750 3751 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) 3752 /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */ 3753 if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0) 3754 return homedir; 3755 #endif 3756 3757 p = mch_getenv(name); 3758 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */ 3759 p = NULL; 3760 3761 if (p != NULL) 3762 { 3763 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264) 3764 if (enc_utf8) 3765 { 3766 int len; 3767 char_u *pp; 3768 3769 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are 3770 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */ 3771 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len); 3772 if (pp != NULL) 3773 { 3774 p = pp; 3775 *mustfree = TRUE; 3776 } 3777 } 3778 #endif 3779 return p; 3780 } 3781 3782 vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0); 3783 if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0) 3784 return NULL; 3785 3786 /* 3787 * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM. 3788 * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty. 3789 */ 3790 if (vimruntime 3791 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF 3792 && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL 3793 #endif 3794 ) 3795 { 3796 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM"); 3797 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */ 3798 p = NULL; 3799 if (p != NULL) 3800 { 3801 p = vim_version_dir(p); 3802 if (p != NULL) 3803 *mustfree = TRUE; 3804 else 3805 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM"); 3806 3807 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264) 3808 if (enc_utf8) 3809 { 3810 int len; 3811 char_u *pp; 3812 3813 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions 3814 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII 3815 * characters. */ 3816 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len); 3817 if (pp != NULL) 3818 { 3819 if (mustfree) 3820 vim_free(p); 3821 p = pp; 3822 *mustfree = TRUE; 3823 } 3824 } 3825 #endif 3826 } 3827 } 3828 3829 /* 3830 * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using: 3831 * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$') 3832 * - the executable name from argv[0] 3833 */ 3834 if (p == NULL) 3835 { 3836 if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL) 3837 p = p_hf; 3838 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3839 /* 3840 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0]. 3841 */ 3842 else 3843 p = exe_name; 3844 #endif 3845 if (p != NULL) 3846 { 3847 /* remove the file name */ 3848 pend = gettail(p); 3849 3850 /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */ 3851 if (p == p_hf) 3852 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc"); 3853 3854 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3855 # ifdef MACOS_X 3856 /* remove "MacOS" from exe_name and add "Resources/vim" */ 3857 if (p == exe_name) 3858 { 3859 char_u *pend1; 3860 char_u *pnew; 3861 3862 pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"MacOS"); 3863 if (pend1 != pend) 3864 { 3865 pnew = alloc((unsigned)(pend1 - p) + 15); 3866 if (pnew != NULL) 3867 { 3868 STRNCPY(pnew, p, (pend1 - p)); 3869 STRCPY(pnew + (pend1 - p), "Resources/vim"); 3870 p = pnew; 3871 pend = p + STRLEN(p); 3872 } 3873 } 3874 } 3875 # endif 3876 /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */ 3877 if (p == exe_name) 3878 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src"); 3879 #endif 3880 3881 /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */ 3882 if (!vimruntime) 3883 { 3884 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME); 3885 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT); 3886 } 3887 3888 /* remove trailing path separator */ 3889 #ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC 3890 /* With MacOS path (with colons) the final colon is required */ 3891 /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */ 3892 if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend)) 3893 --pend; 3894 #endif 3895 3896 #ifdef MACOS_X 3897 if (p == exe_name || p == p_hf) 3898 #endif 3899 /* check that the result is a directory name */ 3900 p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p)); 3901 3902 if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p)) 3903 { 3904 vim_free(p); 3905 p = NULL; 3906 } 3907 else 3908 { 3909 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3910 /* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */ 3911 if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL) 3912 { 3913 vim_free(p); 3914 p = pend; 3915 } 3916 #endif 3917 *mustfree = TRUE; 3918 } 3919 } 3920 } 3921 3922 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF 3923 /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and 3924 * default_vimruntime_dir */ 3925 if (p == NULL) 3926 { 3927 /* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */ 3928 if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL) 3929 { 3930 p = default_vimruntime_dir; 3931 *mustfree = FALSE; 3932 } 3933 else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL) 3934 { 3935 if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL) 3936 *mustfree = TRUE; 3937 else 3938 { 3939 p = default_vim_dir; 3940 *mustfree = FALSE; 3941 } 3942 } 3943 } 3944 #endif 3945 3946 /* 3947 * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast 3948 * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl). 3949 */ 3950 if (p != NULL) 3951 { 3952 if (vimruntime) 3953 { 3954 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p); 3955 didset_vimruntime = TRUE; 3956 #ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT 3957 { 3958 char_u *buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang"); 3959 3960 if (buf != NULL) 3961 { 3962 bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf); 3963 vim_free(buf); 3964 } 3965 } 3966 #endif 3967 } 3968 else 3969 { 3970 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p); 3971 didset_vim = TRUE; 3972 } 3973 } 3974 return p; 3975 } 3976 3977 /* 3978 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists. 3979 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise. 3980 */ 3981 static char_u * 3982 vim_version_dir(vimdir) 3983 char_u *vimdir; 3984 { 3985 char_u *p; 3986 3987 if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL) 3988 return NULL; 3989 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE); 3990 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p)) 3991 return p; 3992 vim_free(p); 3993 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE); 3994 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p)) 3995 return p; 3996 vim_free(p); 3997 return NULL; 3998 } 3999 4000 /* 4001 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus 4002 * the length of "name/". Otherwise return "pend". 4003 */ 4004 static char_u * 4005 remove_tail(p, pend, name) 4006 char_u *p; 4007 char_u *pend; 4008 char_u *name; 4009 { 4010 int len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1; 4011 char_u *newend = pend - len; 4012 4013 if (newend >= p 4014 && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0 4015 && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))) 4016 return newend; 4017 return pend; 4018 } 4019 4020 /* 4021 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string. 4022 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed 4023 * again soon. 4024 */ 4025 char_u * 4026 expand_env_save(src) 4027 char_u *src; 4028 { 4029 char_u *p; 4030 4031 p = alloc(MAXPATHL); 4032 if (p != NULL) 4033 expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL); 4034 return p; 4035 } 4036 4037 /* 4038 * Our portable version of setenv. 4039 */ 4040 void 4041 vim_setenv(name, val) 4042 char_u *name; 4043 char_u *val; 4044 { 4045 #ifdef HAVE_SETENV 4046 mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1); 4047 #else 4048 char_u *envbuf; 4049 4050 /* 4051 * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain 4052 * valid. The allocated memory will never be freed. 4053 */ 4054 envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2)); 4055 if (envbuf != NULL) 4056 { 4057 sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val); 4058 putenv((char *)envbuf); 4059 } 4060 #endif 4061 } 4062 4063 #if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO) 4064 /* 4065 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name. 4066 */ 4067 /*ARGSUSED*/ 4068 char_u * 4069 get_env_name(xp, idx) 4070 expand_T *xp; 4071 int idx; 4072 { 4073 # if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__) 4074 /* 4075 * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW). 4076 */ 4077 return NULL; 4078 # else 4079 # ifndef __WIN32__ 4080 /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */ 4081 extern char **environ; 4082 # endif 4083 # define ENVNAMELEN 100 4084 static char_u name[ENVNAMELEN]; 4085 char_u *str; 4086 int n; 4087 4088 str = (char_u *)environ[idx]; 4089 if (str == NULL) 4090 return NULL; 4091 4092 for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n) 4093 { 4094 if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL) 4095 break; 4096 name[n] = str[n]; 4097 } 4098 name[n] = NUL; 4099 return name; 4100 # endif 4101 } 4102 #endif 4103 4104 /* 4105 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in 4106 * 'src'. 4107 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src. 4108 */ 4109 void 4110 home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one) 4111 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */ 4112 char_u *src; /* input file name */ 4113 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 4114 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 4115 int one; /* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include 4116 spaces and commas in the file name. */ 4117 { 4118 size_t dirlen = 0, envlen = 0; 4119 size_t len; 4120 char_u *homedir_env; 4121 char_u *p; 4122 4123 if (src == NULL) 4124 { 4125 *dst = NUL; 4126 return; 4127 } 4128 4129 /* 4130 * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely. 4131 */ 4132 if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help) 4133 { 4134 STRCPY(dst, gettail(src)); 4135 return; 4136 } 4137 4138 /* 4139 * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the 4140 * "real" home directory. 4141 */ 4142 if (homedir != NULL) 4143 dirlen = STRLEN(homedir); 4144 4145 #ifdef VMS 4146 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN"); 4147 #else 4148 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME"); 4149 #endif 4150 4151 if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL) 4152 homedir_env = NULL; 4153 if (homedir_env != NULL) 4154 envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env); 4155 4156 if (!one) 4157 src = skipwhite(src); 4158 while (*src && dstlen > 0) 4159 { 4160 /* 4161 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name. 4162 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches 4163 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/' 4164 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla", 4165 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up 4166 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user 4167 * er's home directory)). 4168 */ 4169 p = homedir; 4170 len = dirlen; 4171 for (;;) 4172 { 4173 if ( len 4174 && fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0 4175 && (vim_ispathsep(src[len]) 4176 || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' ')) 4177 || src[len] == NUL)) 4178 { 4179 src += len; 4180 if (--dstlen > 0) 4181 *dst++ = '~'; 4182 4183 /* 4184 * If it's just the home directory, add "/". 4185 */ 4186 if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0) 4187 *dst++ = '/'; 4188 break; 4189 } 4190 if (p == homedir_env) 4191 break; 4192 p = homedir_env; 4193 len = envlen; 4194 } 4195 4196 /* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */ 4197 while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0) 4198 *dst++ = *src++; 4199 /* skip separator */ 4200 while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0) 4201 *dst++ = *src++; 4202 } 4203 /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */ 4204 4205 *dst = NUL; 4206 } 4207 4208 /* 4209 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory. 4210 * When something fails, NULL is returned. 4211 */ 4212 char_u * 4213 home_replace_save(buf, src) 4214 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */ 4215 char_u *src; /* input file name */ 4216 { 4217 char_u *dst; 4218 unsigned len; 4219 4220 len = 3; /* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */ 4221 if (src != NULL) /* just in case */ 4222 len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src); 4223 dst = alloc(len); 4224 if (dst != NULL) 4225 home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE); 4226 return dst; 4227 } 4228 4229 /* 4230 * Compare two file names and return: 4231 * FPC_SAME if they both exist and are the same file. 4232 * FPC_SAMEX if they both don't exist and have the same file name. 4233 * FPC_DIFF if they both exist and are different files. 4234 * FPC_NOTX if they both don't exist. 4235 * FPC_DIFFX if one of them doesn't exist. 4236 * For the first name environment variables are expanded 4237 */ 4238 int 4239 fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname) 4240 char_u *s1, *s2; 4241 int checkname; /* when both don't exist, check file names */ 4242 { 4243 #ifdef UNIX 4244 char_u exp1[MAXPATHL]; 4245 char_u full1[MAXPATHL]; 4246 char_u full2[MAXPATHL]; 4247 struct stat st1, st2; 4248 int r1, r2; 4249 4250 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL); 4251 r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1); 4252 r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2); 4253 if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0) 4254 { 4255 /* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */ 4256 if (checkname) 4257 { 4258 if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0) 4259 return FPC_SAMEX; 4260 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4261 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4262 if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0) 4263 return FPC_SAMEX; 4264 } 4265 return FPC_NOTX; 4266 } 4267 if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0) 4268 return FPC_DIFFX; 4269 if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino) 4270 return FPC_SAME; 4271 return FPC_DIFF; 4272 #else 4273 char_u *exp1; /* expanded s1 */ 4274 char_u *full1; /* full path of s1 */ 4275 char_u *full2; /* full path of s2 */ 4276 int retval = FPC_DIFF; 4277 int r1, r2; 4278 4279 /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */ 4280 if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL) 4281 { 4282 full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL; 4283 full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL; 4284 4285 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL); 4286 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4287 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4288 4289 /* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */ 4290 if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK) 4291 { 4292 if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0) 4293 retval = FPC_SAMEX; 4294 else 4295 retval = FPC_NOTX; 4296 } 4297 else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK) 4298 retval = FPC_DIFFX; 4299 else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2)) 4300 retval = FPC_DIFF; 4301 else 4302 retval = FPC_SAME; 4303 vim_free(exp1); 4304 } 4305 return retval; 4306 #endif 4307 } 4308 4309 /* 4310 * Get the tail of a path: the file name. 4311 * Fail safe: never returns NULL. 4312 */ 4313 char_u * 4314 gettail(fname) 4315 char_u *fname; 4316 { 4317 char_u *p1, *p2; 4318 4319 if (fname == NULL) 4320 return (char_u *)""; 4321 for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; ) /* find last part of path */ 4322 { 4323 if (vim_ispathsep(*p2)) 4324 p1 = p2 + 1; 4325 mb_ptr_adv(p2); 4326 } 4327 return p1; 4328 } 4329 4330 /* 4331 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators. Putting a NUL 4332 * here leaves the directory name. Takes care of "c:/" and "//". 4333 * Always returns a valid pointer. 4334 */ 4335 char_u * 4336 gettail_sep(fname) 4337 char_u *fname; 4338 { 4339 char_u *p; 4340 char_u *t; 4341 4342 p = get_past_head(fname); /* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */ 4343 t = gettail(fname); 4344 while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t)) 4345 --t; 4346 #ifdef VMS 4347 /* path separator is part of the path */ 4348 ++t; 4349 #endif 4350 return t; 4351 } 4352 4353 /* 4354 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator). 4355 */ 4356 char_u * 4357 getnextcomp(fname) 4358 char_u *fname; 4359 { 4360 while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname)) 4361 mb_ptr_adv(fname); 4362 if (*fname) 4363 ++fname; 4364 return fname; 4365 } 4366 4367 /* 4368 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name. 4369 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head. 4370 * If there is no head, path is returned. 4371 */ 4372 char_u * 4373 get_past_head(path) 4374 char_u *path; 4375 { 4376 char_u *retval; 4377 4378 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 4379 /* may skip "c:" */ 4380 if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':') 4381 retval = path + 2; 4382 else 4383 retval = path; 4384 #else 4385 # if defined(AMIGA) 4386 /* may skip "label:" */ 4387 retval = vim_strchr(path, ':'); 4388 if (retval == NULL) 4389 retval = path; 4390 # else /* Unix */ 4391 retval = path; 4392 # endif 4393 #endif 4394 4395 while (vim_ispathsep(*retval)) 4396 ++retval; 4397 4398 return retval; 4399 } 4400 4401 /* 4402 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator. 4403 */ 4404 int 4405 vim_ispathsep(c) 4406 int c; 4407 { 4408 #ifdef RISCOS 4409 return (c == '.' || c == ':'); 4410 #else 4411 # ifdef UNIX 4412 return (c == '/'); /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */ 4413 # else 4414 # ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 4415 return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\'); 4416 # else 4417 # ifdef VMS 4418 /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */ 4419 return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/' 4420 || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' ); 4421 # else /* Amiga */ 4422 return (c == ':' || c == '/'); 4423 # endif /* VMS */ 4424 # endif 4425 # endif 4426 #endif /* RISC OS */ 4427 } 4428 4429 #if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO) 4430 /* 4431 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator. 4432 */ 4433 int 4434 vim_ispathlistsep(c) 4435 int c; 4436 { 4437 #ifdef UNIX 4438 return (c == ':'); 4439 #else 4440 return (c == ';'); /* might not be rigth for every system... */ 4441 #endif 4442 } 4443 #endif 4444 4445 /* 4446 * Return TRUE if the directory of "fname" exists, FALSE otherwise. 4447 * Also returns TRUE if there is no directory name. 4448 * "fname" must be writable!. 4449 */ 4450 int 4451 dir_of_file_exists(fname) 4452 char_u *fname; 4453 { 4454 char_u *p; 4455 int c; 4456 int retval; 4457 4458 p = gettail_sep(fname); 4459 if (p == fname) 4460 return TRUE; 4461 c = *p; 4462 *p = NUL; 4463 retval = mch_isdir(fname); 4464 *p = c; 4465 return retval; 4466 } 4467 4468 #if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \ 4469 || defined(PROTO) 4470 /* 4471 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally. 4472 */ 4473 int 4474 vim_fnamecmp(x, y) 4475 char_u *x, *y; 4476 { 4477 return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL); 4478 } 4479 4480 int 4481 vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len) 4482 char_u *x, *y; 4483 size_t len; 4484 { 4485 while (len > 0 && *x && *y) 4486 { 4487 if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y) 4488 && !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\') 4489 && !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/')) 4490 break; 4491 ++x; 4492 ++y; 4493 --len; 4494 } 4495 if (len == 0) 4496 return 0; 4497 return (*x - *y); 4498 } 4499 #endif 4500 4501 /* 4502 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory. 4503 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary. 4504 */ 4505 char_u * 4506 concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep) 4507 char_u *fname1; 4508 char_u *fname2; 4509 int sep; 4510 { 4511 char_u *dest; 4512 4513 dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3)); 4514 if (dest != NULL) 4515 { 4516 STRCPY(dest, fname1); 4517 if (sep) 4518 add_pathsep(dest); 4519 STRCAT(dest, fname2); 4520 } 4521 return dest; 4522 } 4523 4524 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO) 4525 /* 4526 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory. 4527 * Returns NULL when out of memory. 4528 */ 4529 char_u * 4530 concat_str(str1, str2) 4531 char_u *str1; 4532 char_u *str2; 4533 { 4534 char_u *dest; 4535 size_t l = STRLEN(str1); 4536 4537 dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L)); 4538 if (dest != NULL) 4539 { 4540 STRCPY(dest, str1); 4541 STRCPY(dest + l, str2); 4542 } 4543 return dest; 4544 } 4545 #endif 4546 4547 /* 4548 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path 4549 * separator. 4550 */ 4551 void 4552 add_pathsep(p) 4553 char_u *p; 4554 { 4555 if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p))) 4556 STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR); 4557 } 4558 4559 /* 4560 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name. 4561 * Returns NULL when out of memory. 4562 */ 4563 char_u * 4564 FullName_save(fname, force) 4565 char_u *fname; 4566 int force; /* force expansion, even when it already looks 4567 like a full path name */ 4568 { 4569 char_u *buf; 4570 char_u *new_fname = NULL; 4571 4572 if (fname == NULL) 4573 return NULL; 4574 4575 buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL); 4576 if (buf != NULL) 4577 { 4578 if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL) 4579 new_fname = vim_strsave(buf); 4580 else 4581 new_fname = vim_strsave(fname); 4582 vim_free(buf); 4583 } 4584 return new_fname; 4585 } 4586 4587 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL) 4588 4589 static char_u *skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p)); 4590 4591 /* 4592 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now. 4593 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards. 4594 */ 4595 pos_T * 4596 find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 4597 int ind_maxcomment; 4598 { 4599 pos_T *pos; 4600 char_u *line; 4601 char_u *p; 4602 4603 if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) 4604 return NULL; 4605 4606 /* 4607 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string. 4608 */ 4609 line = ml_get(pos->lnum); 4610 for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p) 4611 p = skip_string(p); 4612 if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col) 4613 return NULL; 4614 return pos; 4615 } 4616 4617 /* 4618 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character. 4619 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified. 4620 */ 4621 static char_u * 4622 skip_string(p) 4623 char_u *p; 4624 { 4625 int i; 4626 4627 /* 4628 * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time". 4629 */ 4630 for ( ; ; ++p) 4631 { 4632 if (p[0] == '\'') /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */ 4633 { 4634 if (!p[1]) /* ' at end of line */ 4635 break; 4636 i = 2; 4637 if (p[1] == '\\') /* '\n' or '\000' */ 4638 { 4639 ++i; 4640 while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1])) /* '\000' */ 4641 ++i; 4642 } 4643 if (p[i] == '\'') /* check for trailing ' */ 4644 { 4645 p += i; 4646 continue; 4647 } 4648 } 4649 else if (p[0] == '"') /* start of string */ 4650 { 4651 for (++p; p[0]; ++p) 4652 { 4653 if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL) 4654 ++p; 4655 else if (p[0] == '"') /* end of string */ 4656 break; 4657 } 4658 if (p[0] == '"') 4659 continue; 4660 } 4661 break; /* no string found */ 4662 } 4663 if (!*p) 4664 --p; /* backup from NUL */ 4665 return p; 4666 } 4667 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */ 4668 4669 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO) 4670 4671 /* 4672 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line. 4673 */ 4674 void 4675 do_c_expr_indent() 4676 { 4677 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL 4678 if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL) 4679 fixthisline(get_expr_indent); 4680 else 4681 # endif 4682 fixthisline(get_c_indent); 4683 } 4684 4685 /* 4686 * Functions for C-indenting. 4687 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer. 4688 */ 4689 /* 4690 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line. 4691 */ 4692 4693 static char_u *cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4694 static int cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *)); 4695 static pos_T *find_line_comment __ARGS((void)); 4696 static int cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **)); 4697 static int cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *)); 4698 static char_u *after_label __ARGS((char_u *l)); 4699 static int get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum)); 4700 static int skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment)); 4701 static int cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void)); 4702 static int cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum)); 4703 static int cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *)); 4704 static int cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump)); 4705 static int cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4706 static int cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4707 static int cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int)); 4708 static int cin_isinit __ARGS((void)); 4709 static int cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T)); 4710 static int cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *)); 4711 static int cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *)); 4712 static int cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *)); 4713 static int cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int)); 4714 static int cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *)); 4715 static int cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col)); 4716 static int cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *)); 4717 static int cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos)); 4718 static pos_T *find_start_brace __ARGS((int)); 4719 static pos_T *find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int)); 4720 static int corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos)); 4721 static int find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end)); 4722 static int find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment)); 4723 4724 /* 4725 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line. 4726 */ 4727 static char_u * 4728 cin_skipcomment(s) 4729 char_u *s; 4730 { 4731 while (*s) 4732 { 4733 s = skipwhite(s); 4734 if (*s != '/') 4735 break; 4736 ++s; 4737 if (*s == '/') /* slash-slash comment continues till eol */ 4738 { 4739 s += STRLEN(s); 4740 break; 4741 } 4742 if (*s != '*') 4743 break; 4744 for (++s; *s; ++s) /* skip slash-star comment */ 4745 if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/') 4746 { 4747 s += 2; 4748 break; 4749 } 4750 } 4751 return s; 4752 } 4753 4754 /* 4755 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s. White space and comments are 4756 * not considered code. 4757 */ 4758 static int 4759 cin_nocode(s) 4760 char_u *s; 4761 { 4762 return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL; 4763 } 4764 4765 /* 4766 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines. 4767 */ 4768 static pos_T * 4769 find_line_comment() /* XXX */ 4770 { 4771 static pos_T pos; 4772 char_u *line; 4773 char_u *p; 4774 4775 pos = curwin->w_cursor; 4776 while (--pos.lnum > 0) 4777 { 4778 line = ml_get(pos.lnum); 4779 p = skipwhite(line); 4780 if (cin_islinecomment(p)) 4781 { 4782 pos.col = (int)(p - line); 4783 return &pos; 4784 } 4785 if (*p != NUL) 4786 break; 4787 } 4788 return NULL; 4789 } 4790 4791 /* 4792 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true. 4793 */ 4794 static int 4795 cin_islabel_skip(s) 4796 char_u **s; 4797 { 4798 if (!vim_isIDc(**s)) /* need at least one ID character */ 4799 return FALSE; 4800 4801 while (vim_isIDc(**s)) 4802 (*s)++; 4803 4804 *s = cin_skipcomment(*s); 4805 4806 /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */ 4807 return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':'); 4808 } 4809 4810 /* 4811 * Recognize a label: "label:". 4812 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label. 4813 */ 4814 int 4815 cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 4816 int ind_maxcomment; 4817 { 4818 char_u *s; 4819 4820 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 4821 4822 /* 4823 * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented 4824 * like a switch label. Same for C++ scope declarations. 4825 */ 4826 if (cin_isdefault(s)) 4827 return FALSE; 4828 if (cin_isscopedecl(s)) 4829 return FALSE; 4830 4831 if (cin_islabel_skip(&s)) 4832 { 4833 /* 4834 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case 4835 * label. 4836 */ 4837 pos_T cursor_save; 4838 pos_T *trypos; 4839 char_u *line; 4840 4841 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 4842 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 4843 { 4844 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 4845 4846 /* 4847 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 4848 */ 4849 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 4850 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */ 4851 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 4852 4853 line = ml_get_curline(); 4854 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */ 4855 continue; 4856 if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL) 4857 continue; 4858 4859 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 4860 if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE) 4861 || cin_isscopedecl(line) 4862 || cin_iscase(line) 4863 || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line))) 4864 return TRUE; 4865 return FALSE; 4866 } 4867 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 4868 return TRUE; /* label at start of file??? */ 4869 } 4870 return FALSE; 4871 } 4872 4873 /* 4874 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations. 4875 * Q&D-Implementation: 4876 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line. 4877 */ 4878 static int 4879 cin_isinit(void) 4880 { 4881 char_u *s; 4882 4883 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 4884 4885 if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7])) 4886 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7); 4887 4888 if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4])) 4889 return TRUE; 4890 4891 if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{")) 4892 return TRUE; 4893 4894 return FALSE; 4895 } 4896 4897 /* 4898 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:". 4899 */ 4900 int 4901 cin_iscase(s) 4902 char_u *s; 4903 { 4904 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 4905 if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4])) 4906 { 4907 for (s += 4; *s; ++s) 4908 { 4909 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 4910 if (*s == ':') 4911 { 4912 if (s[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */ 4913 ++s; 4914 else 4915 return TRUE; 4916 } 4917 if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'') 4918 s += 2; /* skip over '.' */ 4919 else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/')) 4920 return FALSE; /* stop at comment */ 4921 else if (*s == '"') 4922 return FALSE; /* stop at string */ 4923 } 4924 return FALSE; 4925 } 4926 4927 if (cin_isdefault(s)) 4928 return TRUE; 4929 return FALSE; 4930 } 4931 4932 /* 4933 * Recognize a "default" switch label. 4934 */ 4935 static int 4936 cin_isdefault(s) 4937 char_u *s; 4938 { 4939 return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0 4940 && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':' 4941 && s[1] != ':'); 4942 } 4943 4944 /* 4945 * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label. 4946 */ 4947 int 4948 cin_isscopedecl(s) 4949 char_u *s; 4950 { 4951 int i; 4952 4953 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 4954 if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0) 4955 i = 6; 4956 else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0) 4957 i = 9; 4958 else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0) 4959 i = 7; 4960 else 4961 return FALSE; 4962 return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':'); 4963 } 4964 4965 /* 4966 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'. 4967 * Return NULL if not found. 4968 * case 234: a = b; 4969 * ^ 4970 */ 4971 static char_u * 4972 after_label(l) 4973 char_u *l; 4974 { 4975 for ( ; *l; ++l) 4976 { 4977 if (*l == ':') 4978 { 4979 if (l[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */ 4980 ++l; 4981 else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1)) 4982 break; 4983 } 4984 else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'') 4985 l += 2; /* skip over 'x' */ 4986 } 4987 if (*l == NUL) 4988 return NULL; 4989 l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1); 4990 if (*l == NUL) 4991 return NULL; 4992 return l; 4993 } 4994 4995 /* 4996 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label. 4997 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label. 4998 */ 4999 static int 5000 get_indent_nolabel(lnum) /* XXX */ 5001 linenr_T lnum; 5002 { 5003 char_u *l; 5004 pos_T fp; 5005 colnr_T col; 5006 char_u *p; 5007 5008 l = ml_get(lnum); 5009 p = after_label(l); 5010 if (p == NULL) 5011 return 0; 5012 5013 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l); 5014 fp.lnum = lnum; 5015 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5016 return (int)col; 5017 } 5018 5019 /* 5020 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label. 5021 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label). 5022 * label: if (asdf && asdfasdf) 5023 * ^ 5024 */ 5025 static int 5026 skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment) 5027 linenr_T lnum; 5028 char_u **pp; 5029 int ind_maxcomment; 5030 { 5031 char_u *l; 5032 int amount; 5033 pos_T cursor_save; 5034 5035 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5036 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 5037 l = ml_get_curline(); 5038 /* XXX */ 5039 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) 5040 { 5041 amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum); 5042 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 5043 if (l == NULL) /* just in case */ 5044 l = ml_get_curline(); 5045 } 5046 else 5047 { 5048 amount = get_indent(); 5049 l = ml_get_curline(); 5050 } 5051 *pp = l; 5052 5053 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5054 return amount; 5055 } 5056 5057 /* 5058 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration. 5059 * int a, indent of "a" 5060 * static struct foo b, indent of "b" 5061 * enum bla c, indent of "c" 5062 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration. 5063 */ 5064 static int 5065 cin_first_id_amount() 5066 { 5067 char_u *line, *p, *s; 5068 int len; 5069 pos_T fp; 5070 colnr_T col; 5071 5072 line = ml_get_curline(); 5073 p = skipwhite(line); 5074 len = skiptowhite(p) - p; 5075 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0) 5076 { 5077 p = skipwhite(p + 6); 5078 len = skiptowhite(p) - p; 5079 } 5080 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0) 5081 p = skipwhite(p + 6); 5082 else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0) 5083 p = skipwhite(p + 4); 5084 else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0) 5085 || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0)) 5086 { 5087 s = skipwhite(p + len); 5088 if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3])) 5089 || (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])) 5090 || (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5])) 5091 || (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))) 5092 p = s; 5093 } 5094 for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len) 5095 ; 5096 if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p)) 5097 return 0; 5098 5099 p = skipwhite(p + len); 5100 fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 5101 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line); 5102 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5103 return (int)col; 5104 } 5105 5106 /* 5107 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign. 5108 * char *foo = "here"; 5109 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found. 5110 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash. 5111 * foo = "asdf\ 5112 * asdf\ 5113 * here"; 5114 */ 5115 static int 5116 cin_get_equal_amount(lnum) 5117 linenr_T lnum; 5118 { 5119 char_u *line; 5120 char_u *s; 5121 colnr_T col; 5122 pos_T fp; 5123 5124 if (lnum > 1) 5125 { 5126 line = ml_get(lnum - 1); 5127 if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\') 5128 return -1; 5129 } 5130 5131 line = s = ml_get(lnum); 5132 while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL) 5133 { 5134 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5135 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5136 else 5137 ++s; 5138 } 5139 if (*s != '=') 5140 return 0; 5141 5142 s = skipwhite(s + 1); 5143 if (cin_nocode(s)) 5144 return 0; 5145 5146 if (*s == '"') /* nice alignment for continued strings */ 5147 ++s; 5148 5149 fp.lnum = lnum; 5150 fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line); 5151 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5152 return (int)col; 5153 } 5154 5155 /* 5156 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'. 5157 */ 5158 static int 5159 cin_ispreproc(s) 5160 char_u *s; 5161 { 5162 s = skipwhite(s); 5163 if (*s == '#') 5164 return TRUE; 5165 return FALSE; 5166 } 5167 5168 /* 5169 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a 5170 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement. Decrease "*lnump" to the 5171 * start and return the line in "*pp". 5172 */ 5173 static int 5174 cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump) 5175 char_u **pp; 5176 linenr_T *lnump; 5177 { 5178 char_u *line = *pp; 5179 linenr_T lnum = *lnump; 5180 int retval = FALSE; 5181 5182 for (;;) 5183 { 5184 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) 5185 { 5186 retval = TRUE; 5187 *lnump = lnum; 5188 break; 5189 } 5190 if (lnum == 1) 5191 break; 5192 line = ml_get(--lnum); 5193 if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\') 5194 break; 5195 } 5196 5197 if (lnum != *lnump) 5198 *pp = ml_get(*lnump); 5199 return retval; 5200 } 5201 5202 /* 5203 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment. 5204 */ 5205 static int 5206 cin_iscomment(p) 5207 char_u *p; 5208 { 5209 return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/')); 5210 } 5211 5212 /* 5213 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment. 5214 */ 5215 static int 5216 cin_islinecomment(p) 5217 char_u *p; 5218 { 5219 return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/'); 5220 } 5221 5222 /* 5223 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'. 5224 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line. 5225 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if 5226 * both apply in order to determine initializations). 5227 */ 5228 static int 5229 cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma) 5230 char_u *s; 5231 int incl_open; /* include '{' at the end as terminator */ 5232 int incl_comma; /* recognize a trailing comma */ 5233 { 5234 char_u found_start = 0; 5235 5236 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5237 5238 if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s))) 5239 found_start = *s; 5240 5241 while (*s) 5242 { 5243 /* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */ 5244 s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s)); 5245 if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}' 5246 || (incl_comma && *s == ',')) 5247 && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5248 return *s; 5249 5250 if (*s) 5251 s++; 5252 } 5253 return found_start; 5254 } 5255 5256 /* 5257 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to 5258 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and 5259 * no semicolons anywhere. 5260 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line. 5261 * "sp" points to a string with the line. When looking at other lines it must 5262 * be restored to the line. When it's NULL fetch lines here. 5263 * "lnum" is where we start looking. 5264 */ 5265 static int 5266 cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum) 5267 char_u **sp; 5268 linenr_T first_lnum; 5269 { 5270 char_u *s; 5271 linenr_T lnum = first_lnum; 5272 int retval = FALSE; 5273 5274 if (sp == NULL) 5275 s = ml_get(lnum); 5276 else 5277 s = *sp; 5278 5279 while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"') 5280 { 5281 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5282 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5283 else 5284 ++s; 5285 } 5286 if (*s != '(') 5287 return FALSE; /* ';', ' or " before any () or no '(' */ 5288 5289 while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"') 5290 { 5291 if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5292 { 5293 /* ')' at the end: may have found a match 5294 * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash: 5295 * #if defined(x) && \ 5296 * defined(y) 5297 */ 5298 lnum = first_lnum - 1; 5299 s = ml_get(lnum); 5300 if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\') 5301 retval = TRUE; 5302 goto done; 5303 } 5304 if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5305 { 5306 /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */ 5307 if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 5308 break; 5309 5310 s = ml_get(++lnum); 5311 } 5312 else if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5313 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5314 else 5315 ++s; 5316 } 5317 5318 done: 5319 if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL) 5320 *sp = ml_get(first_lnum); 5321 5322 return retval; 5323 } 5324 5325 static int 5326 cin_isif(p) 5327 char_u *p; 5328 { 5329 return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2])); 5330 } 5331 5332 static int 5333 cin_iselse(p) 5334 char_u *p; 5335 { 5336 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} else" */ 5337 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1); 5338 return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4])); 5339 } 5340 5341 static int 5342 cin_isdo(p) 5343 char_u *p; 5344 { 5345 return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2])); 5346 } 5347 5348 /* 5349 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do". 5350 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the 5351 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines. 5352 */ 5353 static int 5354 cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen) /* XXX */ 5355 char_u *p; 5356 linenr_T lnum; 5357 int ind_maxparen; 5358 { 5359 pos_T cursor_save; 5360 pos_T *trypos; 5361 int retval = FALSE; 5362 5363 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5364 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */ 5365 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1); 5366 if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5])) 5367 { 5368 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5369 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 5370 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 5371 p = ml_get_curline(); 5372 while (*p && *p != 'w') /* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */ 5373 { 5374 ++p; 5375 ++curwin->w_cursor.col; 5376 } 5377 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL 5378 && *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';') 5379 retval = TRUE; 5380 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5381 } 5382 return retval; 5383 } 5384 5385 static int 5386 cin_isbreak(p) 5387 char_u *p; 5388 { 5389 return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5])); 5390 } 5391 5392 /* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or 5393 * constructor-initialization. eg: 5394 * 5395 * class MyClass : 5396 * baseClass <-- here 5397 * class MyClass : public baseClass, 5398 * anotherBaseClass <-- here (should probably lineup ??) 5399 * MyClass::MyClass(...) : 5400 * baseClass(...) <-- here (constructor-initialization) 5401 */ 5402 static int 5403 cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col) 5404 char_u *line; 5405 colnr_T *col; 5406 { 5407 char_u *s; 5408 int class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class; 5409 5410 *col = 0; 5411 5412 s = skipwhite(line); 5413 if (*s == '#') /* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */ 5414 return FALSE; 5415 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5416 if (*s == NUL) 5417 return FALSE; 5418 5419 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5420 5421 while(*s != NUL) 5422 { 5423 if (s[0] == ':') 5424 { 5425 if (s[1] == ':') 5426 { 5427 /* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor 5428 * initialization any more */ 5429 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5430 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2); 5431 } 5432 else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct) 5433 { 5434 /* we have something found, that looks like the start of 5435 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */ 5436 cpp_base_class = TRUE; 5437 lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5438 *col = 0; 5439 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5440 } 5441 else 5442 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5443 } 5444 else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5])) 5445 || (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6]))) 5446 { 5447 class_or_struct = TRUE; 5448 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5449 5450 if (*s == 'c') 5451 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5); 5452 else 5453 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6); 5454 } 5455 else 5456 { 5457 if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';') 5458 { 5459 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5460 } 5461 else if (s[0] == ')') 5462 { 5463 /* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across 5464 * something like "):" */ 5465 class_or_struct = FALSE; 5466 lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE; 5467 } 5468 else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0])) 5469 { 5470 /* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */ 5471 class_or_struct = FALSE; 5472 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5473 } 5474 else if (*col == 0) 5475 { 5476 /* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */ 5477 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5478 5479 /* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */ 5480 if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0) 5481 *col = (colnr_T)(s - line); 5482 } 5483 5484 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5485 } 5486 } 5487 5488 return cpp_base_class; 5489 } 5490 5491 /* 5492 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by 5493 * white space and comments. Skip strings and comments. 5494 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL. 5495 */ 5496 static int 5497 cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore) 5498 char_u *s; 5499 char_u *find; 5500 char_u *ignore; 5501 { 5502 char_u *p = s; 5503 char_u *r; 5504 int len = (int)STRLEN(find); 5505 5506 while (*p != NUL) 5507 { 5508 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5509 if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0) 5510 { 5511 r = skipwhite(p + len); 5512 if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0) 5513 r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore)); 5514 if (cin_nocode(r)) 5515 return TRUE; 5516 } 5517 if (*p != NUL) 5518 ++p; 5519 } 5520 return FALSE; 5521 } 5522 5523 /* 5524 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos". 5525 * Return the column found. 5526 */ 5527 static int 5528 cin_skip2pos(trypos) 5529 pos_T *trypos; 5530 { 5531 char_u *line; 5532 char_u *p; 5533 5534 p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum); 5535 while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col) 5536 { 5537 if (cin_iscomment(p)) 5538 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5539 else 5540 { 5541 p = skip_string(p); 5542 ++p; 5543 } 5544 } 5545 return (int)(p - line); 5546 } 5547 5548 /* 5549 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in. 5550 * Return NULL if no match found. 5551 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines 5552 * work. */ 5553 /* foo() */ 5554 /* { */ 5555 /* } */ 5556 5557 static pos_T * 5558 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 5559 int ind_maxcomment; 5560 { 5561 pos_T cursor_save; 5562 pos_T *trypos; 5563 pos_T *pos; 5564 static pos_T pos_copy; 5565 5566 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5567 while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL) 5568 { 5569 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */ 5570 trypos = &pos_copy; 5571 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 5572 pos = NULL; 5573 /* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */ 5574 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col 5575 && (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */ 5576 break; 5577 if (pos != NULL) 5578 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 5579 } 5580 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5581 return trypos; 5582 } 5583 5584 /* 5585 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment. 5586 * Return NULL of no match found. 5587 */ 5588 static pos_T * 5589 find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 5590 int ind_maxparen; 5591 int ind_maxcomment; 5592 { 5593 pos_T cursor_save; 5594 pos_T *trypos; 5595 static pos_T pos_copy; 5596 5597 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5598 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL) 5599 { 5600 /* check if the ( is in a // comment */ 5601 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col) 5602 trypos = NULL; 5603 else 5604 { 5605 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */ 5606 trypos = &pos_copy; 5607 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 5608 if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */ 5609 trypos = NULL; 5610 } 5611 } 5612 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5613 return trypos; 5614 } 5615 5616 /* 5617 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the 5618 * cursor position and "startpos". This makes sure that searching for a 5619 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of 5620 * looking a few lines further. 5621 */ 5622 static int 5623 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos) 5624 int ind_maxparen; 5625 pos_T *startpos; 5626 { 5627 long n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 5628 5629 if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2) 5630 return ind_maxparen - (int)n; 5631 return ind_maxparen; 5632 } 5633 5634 /* 5635 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in 5636 * line "l". 5637 */ 5638 static int 5639 find_last_paren(l, start, end) 5640 char_u *l; 5641 int start, end; 5642 { 5643 int i; 5644 int retval = FALSE; 5645 int open_count = 0; 5646 5647 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; /* default is start of line */ 5648 5649 for (i = 0; l[i]; i++) 5650 { 5651 i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */ 5652 i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in quotes */ 5653 if (l[i] == start) 5654 ++open_count; 5655 else if (l[i] == end) 5656 { 5657 if (open_count > 0) 5658 --open_count; 5659 else 5660 { 5661 curwin->w_cursor.col = i; 5662 retval = TRUE; 5663 } 5664 } 5665 } 5666 return retval; 5667 } 5668 5669 int 5670 get_c_indent() 5671 { 5672 /* 5673 * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that 5674 * block should be 5675 */ 5676 int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5677 5678 /* 5679 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a 5680 * line is imagined to be. 5681 */ 5682 int ind_open_imag = 0; 5683 5684 /* 5685 * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by 5686 * an opening brace. 5687 */ 5688 int ind_no_brace = 0; 5689 5690 /* 5691 * column where the first { of a function should be located } 5692 */ 5693 int ind_first_open = 0; 5694 5695 /* 5696 * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be 5697 * located 5698 */ 5699 int ind_open_extra = 0; 5700 5701 /* 5702 * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left 5703 * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close 5704 * brace should be located 5705 */ 5706 int ind_close_extra = 0; 5707 5708 /* 5709 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost 5710 * column is imagined to be 5711 */ 5712 int ind_open_left_imag = 0; 5713 5714 /* 5715 * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located 5716 */ 5717 int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5718 5719 /* 5720 * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located 5721 */ 5722 int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5723 5724 /* 5725 * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label 5726 */ 5727 int ind_case_break = 0; 5728 5729 /* 5730 * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label 5731 * should be located 5732 */ 5733 int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5734 5735 /* 5736 * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located 5737 */ 5738 int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5739 5740 /* 5741 * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented 5742 */ 5743 int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5744 5745 /* 5746 * amount a function type spec should be indented 5747 */ 5748 int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5749 5750 /* 5751 * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization 5752 * should be indented 5753 */ 5754 int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5755 5756 /* 5757 * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line 5758 * should be located 5759 */ 5760 int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5761 5762 /* 5763 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses 5764 */ 5765 int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2; 5766 5767 /* 5768 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which 5769 * itself is also unclosed 5770 */ 5771 int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5772 5773 /* 5774 * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an 5775 * unclosed parentheses. 5776 */ 5777 int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0; 5778 5779 /* 5780 * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and 5781 * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer 5782 * context (for very long lines). 5783 */ 5784 int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0; 5785 5786 /* 5787 * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after 5788 * an unclosed parentheses. 5789 */ 5790 int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0; 5791 5792 /* 5793 * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching 5794 * opening parentheses. 5795 */ 5796 int ind_matching_paren = 0; 5797 5798 /* 5799 * Extra indent for comments. 5800 */ 5801 int ind_comment = 0; 5802 5803 /* 5804 * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it. 5805 */ 5806 int ind_in_comment = 3; 5807 5808 /* 5809 * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something 5810 * after the comment opener. 5811 */ 5812 int ind_in_comment2 = 0; 5813 5814 /* 5815 * max lines to search for an open paren 5816 */ 5817 int ind_maxparen = 20; 5818 5819 /* 5820 * max lines to search for an open comment 5821 */ 5822 int ind_maxcomment = 70; 5823 5824 /* 5825 * handle braces for java code 5826 */ 5827 int ind_java = 0; 5828 5829 /* 5830 * handle blocked cases correctly 5831 */ 5832 int ind_keep_case_label = 0; 5833 5834 pos_T cur_curpos; 5835 int amount; 5836 int scope_amount; 5837 int cur_amount; 5838 colnr_T col; 5839 char_u *theline; 5840 char_u *linecopy; 5841 pos_T *trypos; 5842 pos_T *tryposBrace = NULL; 5843 pos_T our_paren_pos; 5844 char_u *start; 5845 int start_brace; 5846 #define BRACE_IN_COL0 1 /* '{' is in comumn 0 */ 5847 #define BRACE_AT_START 2 /* '{' is at start of line */ 5848 #define BRACE_AT_END 3 /* '{' is at end of line */ 5849 linenr_T ourscope; 5850 char_u *l; 5851 char_u *look; 5852 char_u terminated; 5853 int lookfor; 5854 #define LOOKFOR_INITIAL 0 5855 #define LOOKFOR_IF 1 5856 #define LOOKFOR_DO 2 5857 #define LOOKFOR_CASE 3 5858 #define LOOKFOR_ANY 4 5859 #define LOOKFOR_TERM 5 5860 #define LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6 5861 #define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL 7 5862 #define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 8 5863 #define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS 9 5864 #define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT 10 5865 5866 int whilelevel; 5867 linenr_T lnum; 5868 char_u *options; 5869 int fraction = 0; /* init for GCC */ 5870 int divider; 5871 int n; 5872 int iscase; 5873 int lookfor_break; 5874 int cont_amount = 0; /* amount for continuation line */ 5875 5876 for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; ) 5877 { 5878 l = options++; 5879 if (*options == '-') 5880 ++options; 5881 n = getdigits(&options); 5882 divider = 0; 5883 if (*options == '.') /* ".5s" means a fraction */ 5884 { 5885 fraction = atol((char *)++options); 5886 while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options)) 5887 { 5888 ++options; 5889 if (divider) 5890 divider *= 10; 5891 else 5892 divider = 10; 5893 } 5894 } 5895 if (*options == 's') /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */ 5896 { 5897 if (n == 0 && fraction == 0) 5898 n = curbuf->b_p_sw; /* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */ 5899 else 5900 { 5901 n *= curbuf->b_p_sw; 5902 if (divider) 5903 n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider; 5904 } 5905 ++options; 5906 } 5907 if (l[1] == '-') 5908 n = -n; 5909 /* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in 5910 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */ 5911 switch (*l) 5912 { 5913 case '>': ind_level = n; break; 5914 case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break; 5915 case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break; 5916 case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break; 5917 case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break; 5918 case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break; 5919 case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break; 5920 case ':': ind_case = n; break; 5921 case '=': ind_case_code = n; break; 5922 case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break; 5923 case 'p': ind_param = n; break; 5924 case 't': ind_func_type = n; break; 5925 case '/': ind_comment = n; break; 5926 case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break; 5927 case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break; 5928 case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break; 5929 case '+': ind_continuation = n; break; 5930 case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break; 5931 case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break; 5932 case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break; 5933 case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break; 5934 case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break; 5935 case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break; 5936 case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break; 5937 case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break; 5938 case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break; 5939 case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break; 5940 case 'j': ind_java = n; break; 5941 case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break; 5942 } 5943 } 5944 5945 /* remember where the cursor was when we started */ 5946 cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor; 5947 5948 /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line. 5949 * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with 5950 * ml_get is valid! */ 5951 linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum)); 5952 if (linecopy == NULL) 5953 return 0; 5954 5955 /* 5956 * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the 5957 * cursor position. We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when 5958 * inserting new stuff. 5959 * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus 5960 * check for that. 5961 */ 5962 if ((State & INSERT) 5963 && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy) 5964 && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')') 5965 linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 5966 5967 theline = skipwhite(linecopy); 5968 5969 /* move the cursor to the start of the line */ 5970 5971 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 5972 5973 /* 5974 * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'. 5975 */ 5976 if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE))) 5977 { 5978 amount = 0; 5979 } 5980 5981 /* 5982 * Is it a non-case label? Then that goes at the left margin too. 5983 */ 5984 else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) /* XXX */ 5985 { 5986 amount = 0; 5987 } 5988 5989 /* 5990 * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a 5991 * previous line, lineup with that one. 5992 */ 5993 else if (cin_islinecomment(theline) 5994 && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */ 5995 { 5996 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */ 5997 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 5998 amount = col; 5999 } 6000 6001 /* 6002 * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the 6003 * comment, try using the 'comments' option. 6004 */ 6005 else if (!cin_iscomment(theline) 6006 && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */ 6007 { 6008 int lead_start_len = 2; 6009 int lead_middle_len = 1; 6010 char_u lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* start-comment string */ 6011 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */ 6012 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */ 6013 char_u *p; 6014 int start_align = 0; 6015 int start_off = 0; 6016 int done = FALSE; 6017 6018 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */ 6019 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6020 amount = col; 6021 6022 p = curbuf->b_p_com; 6023 while (*p != NUL) 6024 { 6025 int align = 0; 6026 int off = 0; 6027 int what = 0; 6028 6029 while (*p != NUL && *p != ':') 6030 { 6031 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE) 6032 what = *p++; 6033 else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT) 6034 align = *p++; 6035 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-') 6036 off = getdigits(&p); 6037 else 6038 ++p; 6039 } 6040 6041 if (*p == ':') 6042 ++p; 6043 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 6044 if (what == COM_START) 6045 { 6046 STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end); 6047 lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start); 6048 start_off = off; 6049 start_align = align; 6050 } 6051 else if (what == COM_MIDDLE) 6052 { 6053 STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end); 6054 lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle); 6055 } 6056 else if (what == COM_END) 6057 { 6058 /* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it 6059 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */ 6060 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0 6061 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0) 6062 { 6063 done = TRUE; 6064 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 6065 { 6066 /* If the start comment string matches in the previous 6067 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset. If 6068 * the middle comment string matches in the previous 6069 * line, use the indent of that line. XXX */ 6070 look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1)); 6071 if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0) 6072 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6073 else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle, 6074 lead_middle_len) == 0) 6075 { 6076 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6077 break; 6078 } 6079 /* If the start comment string doesn't match with the 6080 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */ 6081 else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col, 6082 lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0) 6083 continue; 6084 } 6085 if (start_off != 0) 6086 amount += start_off; 6087 else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT) 6088 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start) 6089 - vim_strsize(lead_middle); 6090 break; 6091 } 6092 6093 /* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up 6094 * with the middle comment */ 6095 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0 6096 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0) 6097 { 6098 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6099 /* XXX */ 6100 if (off != 0) 6101 amount += off; 6102 else if (align == COM_RIGHT) 6103 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start) 6104 - vim_strsize(lead_middle); 6105 done = TRUE; 6106 break; 6107 } 6108 } 6109 } 6110 6111 /* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the 6112 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up 6113 * with the first character of the comment text. 6114 */ 6115 if (done) 6116 ; 6117 else if (theline[0] == '*') 6118 amount += 1; 6119 else 6120 { 6121 /* 6122 * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take 6123 * the indent of the previous non-empty line. If 'cino' has "CO" 6124 * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any 6125 * white characters after it line up with the text after it; 6126 * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino' 6127 */ 6128 amount = -1; 6129 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum) 6130 { 6131 if (linewhite(lnum)) /* skip blank lines */ 6132 continue; 6133 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */ 6134 break; 6135 } 6136 if (amount == -1) /* use the comment opener */ 6137 { 6138 if (!ind_in_comment2) 6139 { 6140 start = ml_get(trypos->lnum); 6141 look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */ 6142 if (*look != NUL) /* if something after it */ 6143 trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start); 6144 } 6145 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6146 amount = col; 6147 if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL) 6148 amount += ind_in_comment; 6149 } 6150 } 6151 } 6152 6153 /* 6154 * Are we inside parentheses or braces? 6155 */ /* XXX */ 6156 else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6157 && ind_java == 0) 6158 || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6159 || trypos != NULL) 6160 { 6161 if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL) 6162 { 6163 /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found. Use the one which is 6164 * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */ 6165 if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum 6166 ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum 6167 : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col) 6168 trypos = NULL; 6169 else 6170 tryposBrace = NULL; 6171 } 6172 6173 if (trypos != NULL) 6174 { 6175 /* 6176 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of 6177 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren. 6178 */ 6179 amount = -1; 6180 cur_amount = MAXCOL; 6181 our_paren_pos = *trypos; 6182 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum) 6183 { 6184 l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum)); 6185 if (cin_nocode(l)) /* skip comment lines */ 6186 continue; 6187 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */ 6188 continue; 6189 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 6190 6191 /* Skip a comment. XXX */ 6192 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6193 { 6194 lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6195 continue; 6196 } 6197 6198 /* XXX */ 6199 if ((trypos = find_match_paren( 6200 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos), 6201 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6202 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum 6203 && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col) 6204 { 6205 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */ 6206 6207 if (theline[0] == ')') 6208 { 6209 if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount) 6210 cur_amount = amount; 6211 amount = -1; 6212 } 6213 break; 6214 } 6215 } 6216 6217 /* 6218 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX 6219 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed 6220 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses. 6221 */ 6222 if (amount == -1) 6223 { 6224 amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment); 6225 if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0 6226 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '(')) 6227 { 6228 /* 6229 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there; 6230 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character. 6231 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is 6232 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the 6233 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next 6234 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long 6235 * lines). 6236 */ 6237 if (theline[0] != ')') 6238 { 6239 cur_amount = MAXCOL; 6240 l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum); 6241 if (ind_unclosed_wrapped 6242 && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL)) 6243 { 6244 /* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level 6245 * for each additional level */ 6246 n = 1; 6247 for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col) 6248 { 6249 switch (l[col]) 6250 { 6251 case '(': 6252 case '{': ++n; 6253 break; 6254 6255 case ')': 6256 case '}': if (n > 1) 6257 --n; 6258 break; 6259 } 6260 } 6261 6262 our_paren_pos.col = 0; 6263 amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped; 6264 } 6265 else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok) 6266 our_paren_pos.col++; 6267 else 6268 { 6269 col = our_paren_pos.col + 1; 6270 while (vim_iswhite(l[col])) 6271 col++; 6272 if (l[col] != NUL) /* In case of trailing space */ 6273 our_paren_pos.col = col; 6274 else 6275 our_paren_pos.col++; 6276 } 6277 } 6278 6279 /* 6280 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it 6281 * if we did the above "if". 6282 */ 6283 if (our_paren_pos.col > 0) 6284 { 6285 getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6286 if (cur_amount > (int)col) 6287 cur_amount = col; 6288 } 6289 } 6290 6291 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren) 6292 { 6293 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */ 6294 } 6295 else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore 6296 && *skipwhite(look) == '(')) 6297 { 6298 if (cur_amount != MAXCOL) 6299 amount = cur_amount; 6300 } 6301 else 6302 { 6303 /* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */ 6304 col = our_paren_pos.col; 6305 while (our_paren_pos.col > 0) 6306 { 6307 --our_paren_pos.col; 6308 switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos)) 6309 { 6310 case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2; 6311 col = our_paren_pos.col; 6312 break; 6313 case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2; 6314 col = MAXCOL; 6315 break; 6316 } 6317 } 6318 6319 /* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside 6320 * braces */ 6321 if (col == MAXCOL) 6322 amount += ind_unclosed; 6323 else 6324 { 6325 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum; 6326 curwin->w_cursor.col = col; 6327 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6328 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6329 amount += ind_unclosed2; 6330 else 6331 amount += ind_unclosed; 6332 } 6333 /* 6334 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two 6335 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous 6336 * lines: 6337 * func_long_name( if (x 6338 * arg && yy 6339 * ) ^ not here ) ^ not here 6340 */ 6341 if (cur_amount < amount) 6342 amount = cur_amount; 6343 } 6344 } 6345 6346 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 6347 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 6348 amount += ind_comment; 6349 } 6350 6351 /* 6352 * Are we at least inside braces, then? 6353 */ 6354 else 6355 { 6356 trypos = tryposBrace; 6357 6358 ourscope = trypos->lnum; 6359 start = ml_get(ourscope); 6360 6361 /* 6362 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general. 6363 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that; 6364 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as 6365 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that. 6366 */ 6367 look = skipwhite(start); 6368 if (*look == '{') 6369 { 6370 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6371 amount = col; 6372 if (*start == '{') 6373 start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0; 6374 else 6375 start_brace = BRACE_AT_START; 6376 } 6377 else 6378 { 6379 /* 6380 * that opening brace might have been on a continuation 6381 * line. if so, find the start of the line. 6382 */ 6383 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope; 6384 6385 /* 6386 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 6387 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 6388 */ 6389 lnum = ourscope; 6390 if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')') 6391 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6392 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6393 lnum = trypos->lnum; 6394 6395 /* 6396 * It could have been something like 6397 * case 1: if (asdf && 6398 * ldfd) { 6399 * } 6400 */ 6401 if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline()))) 6402 amount = get_indent(); 6403 else 6404 amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment); 6405 6406 start_brace = BRACE_AT_END; 6407 } 6408 6409 /* 6410 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where 6411 * we want to be. otherwise, add the amount of room 6412 * that an indent is supposed to be. 6413 */ 6414 if (theline[0] == '}') 6415 { 6416 /* 6417 * they may want closing braces to line up with something 6418 * other than the open brace. indulge them, if so. 6419 */ 6420 amount += ind_close_extra; 6421 } 6422 else 6423 { 6424 /* 6425 * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if" 6426 * to match it with. 6427 * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do" 6428 * to match it with. 6429 */ 6430 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL; 6431 if (cin_iselse(theline)) 6432 lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF; 6433 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 6434 /* XXX */ 6435 lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO; 6436 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL) 6437 { 6438 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum; 6439 if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, 6440 ind_maxcomment) == OK) 6441 { 6442 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 6443 goto theend; 6444 } 6445 } 6446 6447 /* 6448 * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or 6449 * failed to find a matching "if"). 6450 * Search backwards for something to line up with. 6451 * First set amount for when we don't find anything. 6452 */ 6453 6454 /* 6455 * if the '{' is _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary 6456 * location of a left-margin brace. Otherwise, correct the 6457 * location for ind_open_extra. 6458 */ 6459 6460 if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0) /* '{' is in column 0 */ 6461 { 6462 amount = ind_open_left_imag; 6463 } 6464 else 6465 { 6466 if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END) /* '{' is at end of line */ 6467 amount += ind_open_imag; 6468 else 6469 { 6470 /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */ 6471 amount -= ind_open_extra; 6472 if (amount < 0) 6473 amount = 0; 6474 } 6475 } 6476 6477 lookfor_break = FALSE; 6478 6479 if (cin_iscase(theline)) /* it's a switch() label */ 6480 { 6481 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE; /* find a previous switch() label */ 6482 amount += ind_case; 6483 } 6484 else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline)) /* private:, ... */ 6485 { 6486 lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL; /* class decl is this block */ 6487 amount += ind_scopedecl; 6488 } 6489 else 6490 { 6491 if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline)) /* break; ... */ 6492 lookfor_break = TRUE; 6493 6494 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL; 6495 amount += ind_level; /* ind_level from start of block */ 6496 } 6497 scope_amount = amount; 6498 whilelevel = 0; 6499 6500 /* 6501 * Search backwards. If we find something we recognize, line up 6502 * with that. 6503 * 6504 * if we're looking at an open brace, indent 6505 * the usual amount relative to the conditional 6506 * that opens the block. 6507 */ 6508 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 6509 for (;;) 6510 { 6511 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 6512 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 6513 6514 /* 6515 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line 6516 * up with it. 6517 */ 6518 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope) 6519 { 6520 /* we reached end of scope: 6521 * if looking for a enum or structure initialization 6522 * go further back: 6523 * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then 6524 * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable 6525 * declaration: 6526 * int x, 6527 * here; <-- add ind_continuation 6528 */ 6529 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 6530 { 6531 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0 6532 || curwin->w_cursor.lnum 6533 < ourscope - ind_maxparen) 6534 { 6535 /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit) 6536 * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable 6537 * initialization) */ 6538 if (cont_amount > 0) 6539 amount = cont_amount; 6540 else 6541 amount += ind_continuation; 6542 break; 6543 } 6544 6545 l = ml_get_curline(); 6546 6547 /* 6548 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the 6549 * comment. 6550 */ 6551 trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment); 6552 if (trypos != NULL) 6553 { 6554 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6555 continue; 6556 } 6557 6558 /* 6559 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines. 6560 */ 6561 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 6562 continue; 6563 6564 if (cin_nocode(l)) 6565 continue; 6566 6567 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE); 6568 6569 /* 6570 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a 6571 * function declaration, we are done 6572 * (it's a variable declaration). 6573 */ 6574 if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0 6575 || !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 6576 { 6577 /* if the line is terminated with another ',' 6578 * it is a continued variable initialization. 6579 * don't add extra indent. 6580 * TODO: does not work, if a function 6581 * declaration is split over multiple lines: 6582 * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then. 6583 */ 6584 if (terminated == ',') 6585 break; 6586 6587 /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment, 6588 * we are done. 6589 */ 6590 if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit()) 6591 break; 6592 6593 /* nothing useful found */ 6594 if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{') 6595 continue; 6596 } 6597 6598 if (terminated != ';') 6599 { 6600 /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor 6601 * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it 6602 * will take us back to the start of the line. 6603 */ /* XXX */ 6604 trypos = NULL; 6605 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')) 6606 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6607 ind_maxcomment); 6608 6609 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}')) 6610 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); 6611 6612 if (trypos != NULL) 6613 { 6614 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6615 continue; 6616 } 6617 } 6618 6619 /* it's a variable declaration, add indentation 6620 * like in 6621 * int a, 6622 * b; 6623 */ 6624 if (cont_amount > 0) 6625 amount = cont_amount; 6626 else 6627 amount += ind_continuation; 6628 } 6629 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 6630 { 6631 if (cont_amount > 0) 6632 amount = cont_amount; 6633 else 6634 amount += ind_continuation; 6635 } 6636 else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM 6637 && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 6638 { 6639 amount = scope_amount; 6640 if (theline[0] == '{') 6641 amount += ind_open_extra; 6642 } 6643 break; 6644 } 6645 6646 /* 6647 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 6648 */ /* XXX */ 6649 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6650 { 6651 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6652 continue; 6653 } 6654 6655 l = ml_get_curline(); 6656 6657 /* 6658 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that. 6659 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same. 6660 */ 6661 iscase = cin_iscase(l); 6662 if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 6663 { 6664 /* we are only looking for cpp base class 6665 * declaration/initialization any longer */ 6666 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 6667 break; 6668 6669 /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in 6670 * labels. */ 6671 if (whilelevel > 0) 6672 continue; 6673 6674 /* 6675 * case xx: 6676 * c = 99 + <- this indent plus continuation 6677 *-> here; 6678 */ 6679 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6680 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 6681 { 6682 if (cont_amount > 0) 6683 amount = cont_amount; 6684 else 6685 amount += ind_continuation; 6686 break; 6687 } 6688 6689 /* 6690 * case xx: <- line up with this case 6691 * x = 333; 6692 * case yy: 6693 */ 6694 if ( (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE) 6695 || (iscase && lookfor_break) 6696 || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)) 6697 { 6698 /* 6699 * Check that this case label is not for another 6700 * switch() 6701 */ /* XXX */ 6702 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) == 6703 NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope) 6704 { 6705 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 6706 break; 6707 } 6708 continue; 6709 } 6710 6711 n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum); /* XXX */ 6712 6713 /* 6714 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if 6715 * y = y + 1; 6716 * -> s = 99; 6717 * 6718 * case xx: 6719 * if (cond) <- line up with this line 6720 * y = y + 1; 6721 * -> s = 99; 6722 */ 6723 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM) 6724 { 6725 if (n) 6726 amount = n; 6727 6728 if (!lookfor_break) 6729 break; 6730 } 6731 6732 /* 6733 * case xx: x = x + 1; <- line up with this x 6734 * -> y = y + 1; 6735 * 6736 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if 6737 * -> y = y + 1; 6738 */ 6739 if (n) 6740 { 6741 amount = n; 6742 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 6743 if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l)) 6744 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace; 6745 break; 6746 } 6747 6748 /* 6749 * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch 6750 * label. If nothing is found, line up relative to the 6751 * switch label. 6752 * break; <- may line up with this line 6753 * case xx: 6754 * -> y = 1; 6755 */ 6756 scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase /* XXX */ 6757 ? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code); 6758 lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY; 6759 continue; 6760 } 6761 6762 /* 6763 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration, 6764 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks. 6765 */ 6766 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL) 6767 { 6768 if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos = 6769 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6770 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6771 continue; 6772 } 6773 6774 /* 6775 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them. 6776 */ 6777 if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) 6778 { 6779 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 6780 if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l)) 6781 continue; 6782 } 6783 6784 /* 6785 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc. 6786 * Ignore comment and empty lines. 6787 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have 6788 * unlocked it) 6789 */ 6790 l = ml_get_curline(); 6791 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum) 6792 || cin_nocode(l)) 6793 continue; 6794 6795 /* 6796 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or 6797 * constructor initialization? 6798 */ /* XXX */ 6799 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass 6800 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col)) 6801 { 6802 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 6803 { 6804 if (cont_amount > 0) 6805 amount = cont_amount; 6806 else 6807 amount += ind_continuation; 6808 } 6809 else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{') 6810 { 6811 amount = get_indent(); 6812 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 6813 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6814 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6815 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */ 6816 if (theline[0] != '{') 6817 amount += ind_cpp_baseclass; 6818 } 6819 else 6820 { 6821 curwin->w_cursor.col = col; 6822 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL); 6823 amount = (int)col; 6824 } 6825 break; 6826 } 6827 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 6828 { 6829 /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class 6830 * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */ 6831 if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE)) 6832 break; 6833 else 6834 continue; 6835 } 6836 6837 /* 6838 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated. 6839 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if 6840 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg: 6841 * 123, 6842 * sizeof 6843 * here 6844 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure 6845 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration 6846 * (indented). 6847 */ 6848 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE); 6849 6850 if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6851 && terminated == ',')) 6852 { 6853 /* 6854 * if we're in the middle of a paren thing, 6855 * go back to the line that starts it so 6856 * we can get the right prevailing indent 6857 * if ( foo && 6858 * bar ) 6859 */ 6860 /* 6861 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 6862 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 6863 */ 6864 (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'); 6865 trypos = find_match_paren( 6866 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos), 6867 ind_maxcomment); 6868 6869 /* 6870 * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching 6871 * braces. 6872 */ 6873 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}')) 6874 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); 6875 6876 if (trypos != NULL) 6877 { 6878 /* 6879 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is 6880 * handled above. 6881 * case xx: if ( asdf && 6882 * asdf) 6883 */ 6884 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 6885 l = ml_get_curline(); 6886 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 6887 { 6888 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 6889 continue; 6890 } 6891 } 6892 6893 /* 6894 * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the 6895 * indent from 6896 * char *usethis = "bla\ 6897 * bla", 6898 * here; 6899 */ 6900 if (terminated == ',') 6901 { 6902 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 6903 { 6904 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6905 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\') 6906 break; 6907 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 6908 } 6909 } 6910 6911 /* 6912 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line, 6913 * ignoring any jump label. XXX 6914 */ 6915 cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 6916 &l, ind_maxcomment); 6917 6918 /* 6919 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it 6920 * starts with a '{', line it up with this line. 6921 * while (not) 6922 * -> { 6923 * } 6924 */ 6925 if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM 6926 && theline[0] == '{') 6927 { 6928 amount = cur_amount; 6929 /* 6930 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line 6931 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match 6932 * in the same line (scope is the same). Probably: 6933 * { 1, 2 }, 6934 * -> { 3, 4 } 6935 */ 6936 if (*skipwhite(l) != '{') 6937 amount += ind_open_extra; 6938 6939 if (ind_cpp_baseclass) 6940 { 6941 /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base 6942 * class declaration or initialization */ 6943 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS; 6944 continue; 6945 } 6946 break; 6947 } 6948 6949 /* 6950 * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc. 6951 * Also allow " } else". 6952 */ 6953 if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l))) 6954 { 6955 /* 6956 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up 6957 * with the last one. 6958 * if (cond) 6959 * 100 + 6960 * -> here; 6961 */ 6962 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6963 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 6964 { 6965 if (cont_amount > 0) 6966 amount = cont_amount; 6967 else 6968 amount += ind_continuation; 6969 break; 6970 } 6971 6972 /* 6973 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we 6974 * are finished. 6975 * while (not) 6976 * -> here; 6977 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line 6978 * before this is terminated. 6979 * yyy; 6980 * if (stat) 6981 * while (not) 6982 * xxx; 6983 * -> here; 6984 */ 6985 amount = cur_amount; 6986 if (theline[0] == '{') 6987 amount += ind_open_extra; 6988 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM) 6989 { 6990 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace; 6991 break; 6992 } 6993 6994 /* 6995 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a 6996 * do, line up with the while() 6997 * do 6998 * x = 1; 6999 * -> here 7000 */ 7001 l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline()); 7002 if (cin_isdo(l)) 7003 { 7004 if (whilelevel == 0) 7005 break; 7006 --whilelevel; 7007 } 7008 7009 /* 7010 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the 7011 * one between the "if" and the "else". 7012 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX 7013 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {". 7014 */ 7015 if (cin_iselse(l) 7016 && whilelevel == 0 7017 && ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) 7018 == NULL 7019 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum, 7020 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL)) 7021 break; 7022 } 7023 7024 /* 7025 * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an 7026 * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or 7027 * add someting for a continuation line, depending on 7028 * the line before this one. 7029 */ 7030 else 7031 { 7032 /* 7033 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with 7034 * the last one. 7035 * c = 99 + 7036 * 100 + 7037 * -> here; 7038 */ 7039 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 7040 { 7041 /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */ 7042 if (terminated == ',') 7043 amount += ind_continuation; 7044 break; 7045 } 7046 7047 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7048 { 7049 /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the 7050 * lowest one, but check for cpp base class 7051 * declaration/initialization, if it is an 7052 * opening brace or we are looking just for 7053 * enumerations/initializations. */ 7054 if (terminated == ',') 7055 { 7056 if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0) 7057 break; 7058 7059 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS; 7060 continue; 7061 } 7062 7063 /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but 7064 * reduce indent. */ 7065 if (amount > cur_amount) 7066 amount = cur_amount; 7067 } 7068 else 7069 { 7070 /* 7071 * Found first unterminated line on a row, may 7072 * line up with this line, remember its indent 7073 * 100 + 7074 * -> here; 7075 */ 7076 amount = cur_amount; 7077 7078 /* 7079 * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we 7080 * are in an initialization or enum 7081 * struct xxx = 7082 * { 7083 * sizeof a, 7084 * 124 }; 7085 * or a normal possible continuation line. 7086 * but only, of no other statement has been found 7087 * yet. 7088 */ 7089 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',') 7090 { 7091 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT; 7092 cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount(); 7093 } 7094 else 7095 { 7096 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL 7097 && *l != NUL 7098 && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\') 7099 /* XXX */ 7100 cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount( 7101 curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 7102 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM) 7103 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM; 7104 } 7105 } 7106 } 7107 } 7108 7109 /* 7110 * Check if we are after a while (cond); 7111 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do". 7112 */ 7113 /* XXX */ 7114 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l, 7115 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 7116 { 7117 /* 7118 * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up 7119 * with the last one. 7120 * while (cond); 7121 * 100 + <- line up with this one 7122 * -> here; 7123 */ 7124 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7125 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7126 { 7127 if (cont_amount > 0) 7128 amount = cont_amount; 7129 else 7130 amount += ind_continuation; 7131 break; 7132 } 7133 7134 if (whilelevel == 0) 7135 { 7136 lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM; 7137 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7138 if (theline[0] == '{') 7139 amount += ind_open_extra; 7140 } 7141 ++whilelevel; 7142 } 7143 7144 /* 7145 * We are after a "normal" statement. 7146 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the 7147 * indent of that other statement. 7148 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used, 7149 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement. 7150 */ 7151 else 7152 { 7153 /* 7154 * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It 7155 * may be lined up with the case label. 7156 */ 7157 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 7158 && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline()))) 7159 { 7160 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY; 7161 continue; 7162 } 7163 7164 /* 7165 * Handle "do {" line. 7166 */ 7167 if (whilelevel > 0) 7168 { 7169 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7170 if (cin_isdo(l)) 7171 { 7172 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7173 --whilelevel; 7174 continue; 7175 } 7176 } 7177 7178 /* 7179 * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add 7180 * the amount for a continuation line. 7181 * x = 1; 7182 * y = foo + 7183 * -> here; 7184 * or 7185 * int x = 1; 7186 * int foo, 7187 * -> here; 7188 */ 7189 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7190 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7191 { 7192 if (cont_amount > 0) 7193 amount = cont_amount; 7194 else 7195 amount += ind_continuation; 7196 break; 7197 } 7198 7199 /* 7200 * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if" 7201 * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us. 7202 * x = 1; x = 1; 7203 * if (asdf) y = 2; 7204 * while (asdf) ->here; 7205 * here; 7206 * ->foo; 7207 */ 7208 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM) 7209 { 7210 if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0) 7211 break; 7212 } 7213 7214 /* 7215 * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated. 7216 * To know what needs to be done look further backward for 7217 * a terminated line. 7218 */ 7219 else 7220 { 7221 /* 7222 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so 7223 * that matching it will take us back to the start of 7224 * the line. Helps for: 7225 * func(asdr, 7226 * asdfasdf); 7227 * here; 7228 */ 7229 term_again: 7230 l = ml_get_curline(); 7231 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 7232 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7233 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7234 { 7235 /* 7236 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is 7237 * handled above. 7238 * case xx: if ( asdf && 7239 * asdf) 7240 */ 7241 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7242 l = ml_get_curline(); 7243 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 7244 { 7245 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7246 continue; 7247 } 7248 } 7249 7250 /* When aligning with the case statement, don't align 7251 * with a statement after it. 7252 * case 1: { <-- don't use this { position 7253 * stat; 7254 * } 7255 * case 2: 7256 * stat; 7257 * } 7258 */ 7259 iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l)); 7260 7261 /* 7262 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line, 7263 * ignoring any jump label. 7264 */ 7265 amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 7266 &l, ind_maxcomment); 7267 7268 if (theline[0] == '{') 7269 amount += ind_open_extra; 7270 /* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */ 7271 if (*skipwhite(l) == '{') 7272 amount -= ind_open_extra; 7273 lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM; 7274 7275 /* 7276 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of 7277 * that block. 7278 */ 7279 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7280 if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}' 7281 && (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) 7282 != NULL) /* XXX */ 7283 { 7284 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7285 /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */ 7286 /* but skip block for "} else {" */ 7287 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7288 if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l)) 7289 goto term_again; 7290 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7291 } 7292 } 7293 } 7294 } 7295 } 7296 } 7297 7298 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 7299 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 7300 amount += ind_comment; 7301 } 7302 7303 /* 7304 * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all! 7305 * 7306 * this means we're at the top level, and everything should 7307 * basically just match where the previous line is, except 7308 * for the lines immediately following a function declaration, 7309 * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented. 7310 */ 7311 else 7312 { 7313 /* 7314 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any 7315 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start 7316 * of a function 7317 */ 7318 7319 if (theline[0] == '{') 7320 { 7321 amount = ind_first_open; 7322 } 7323 7324 /* 7325 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current 7326 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec. 7327 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment 7328 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'. 7329 */ 7330 else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count 7331 && !cin_nocode(theline) 7332 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL) 7333 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7334 && cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1) 7335 && !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE)) 7336 { 7337 amount = ind_func_type; 7338 } 7339 else 7340 { 7341 amount = 0; 7342 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 7343 7344 /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */ 7345 7346 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 7347 { 7348 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 7349 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7350 7351 l = ml_get_curline(); 7352 7353 /* 7354 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 7355 */ /* XXX */ 7356 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7357 { 7358 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 7359 continue; 7360 } 7361 7362 /* 7363 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor 7364 * initialization? 7365 */ /* XXX */ 7366 if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{' 7367 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col)) 7368 { 7369 if (col == 0) 7370 { 7371 amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */ 7372 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 7373 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7374 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7375 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum) 7376 + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */ 7377 } 7378 else 7379 { 7380 curwin->w_cursor.col = col; 7381 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL); 7382 amount = (int)col; 7383 } 7384 break; 7385 } 7386 7387 /* 7388 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines. 7389 */ 7390 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 7391 continue; 7392 7393 if (cin_nocode(l)) 7394 continue; 7395 7396 /* 7397 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of 7398 * indentation: 7399 * int foo, 7400 * bar; 7401 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg. 7402 * enum foobar 7403 * { 7404 * ... 7405 * } foo, 7406 * bar; 7407 */ 7408 n = 0; 7409 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7410 || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\')) 7411 { 7412 /* take us back to opening paren */ 7413 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 7414 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7415 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7416 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7417 7418 /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go 7419 * back to the first line with a backslash: 7420 * char *foo = "bla\ 7421 * bla", 7422 * here; 7423 */ 7424 while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 7425 { 7426 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 7427 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\') 7428 break; 7429 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7430 } 7431 7432 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7433 7434 if (amount == 0) 7435 amount = cin_first_id_amount(); 7436 if (amount == 0) 7437 amount = ind_continuation; 7438 break; 7439 } 7440 7441 /* 7442 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're 7443 * not in a comment, put it the left margin. 7444 */ 7445 if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum)) /* XXX */ 7446 break; 7447 l = ml_get_curline(); 7448 7449 /* 7450 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function. Put 7451 * current line at the left margin. For when 'cino' has "fs". 7452 */ 7453 if (*skipwhite(l) == '}') 7454 break; 7455 7456 /* (matching {) 7457 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by 7458 * comments) align at column 0. For example: 7459 * char *string_array[] = { "foo", 7460 * / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * / 7461 */ 7462 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL)) 7463 break; 7464 7465 /* 7466 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current 7467 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as 7468 * parameters. 7469 */ 7470 if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 7471 { 7472 amount = ind_param; 7473 break; 7474 } 7475 7476 /* 7477 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the 7478 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero: 7479 * int foo, 7480 * bar; 7481 * indent_to_0 here; 7482 */ 7483 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL)) 7484 { 7485 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 7486 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7487 || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')) 7488 break; 7489 l = ml_get_curline(); 7490 } 7491 7492 /* 7493 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just 7494 * use the indent of this line. 7495 * 7496 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 7497 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 7498 */ 7499 find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'); 7500 7501 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7502 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7503 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7504 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7505 break; 7506 } 7507 7508 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 7509 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 7510 amount += ind_comment; 7511 7512 /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash: 7513 * "asdfasdf\ 7514 * here"; 7515 * char *foo = "asdf\ 7516 * here"; 7517 */ 7518 if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1) 7519 { 7520 l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1); 7521 if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\') 7522 { 7523 cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1); 7524 if (cur_amount > 0) 7525 amount = cur_amount; 7526 else if (cur_amount == 0) 7527 amount += ind_continuation; 7528 } 7529 } 7530 } 7531 } 7532 7533 theend: 7534 /* put the cursor back where it belongs */ 7535 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 7536 7537 vim_free(linecopy); 7538 7539 if (amount < 0) 7540 return 0; 7541 return amount; 7542 } 7543 7544 static int 7545 find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) 7546 int lookfor; 7547 linenr_T ourscope; 7548 int ind_maxparen; 7549 int ind_maxcomment; 7550 { 7551 char_u *look; 7552 pos_T *theirscope; 7553 char_u *mightbeif; 7554 int elselevel; 7555 int whilelevel; 7556 7557 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF) 7558 { 7559 elselevel = 1; 7560 whilelevel = 0; 7561 } 7562 else 7563 { 7564 elselevel = 0; 7565 whilelevel = 1; 7566 } 7567 7568 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7569 7570 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1) 7571 { 7572 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 7573 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7574 7575 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7576 if (cin_iselse(look) 7577 || cin_isif(look) 7578 || cin_isdo(look) /* XXX */ 7579 || cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 7580 { 7581 /* 7582 * if we've gone outside the braces entirely, 7583 * we must be out of scope... 7584 */ 7585 theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); /* XXX */ 7586 if (theirscope == NULL) 7587 break; 7588 7589 /* 7590 * and if the brace enclosing this is further 7591 * back than the one enclosing the else, we're 7592 * out of luck too. 7593 */ 7594 if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope) 7595 break; 7596 7597 /* 7598 * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace, 7599 * then we can ignore it because it's in a 7600 * different scope... 7601 */ 7602 if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope) 7603 continue; 7604 7605 /* 7606 * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if") 7607 * then we need to go back to another if, so 7608 * increment elselevel 7609 */ 7610 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7611 if (cin_iselse(look)) 7612 { 7613 mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4); 7614 if (!cin_isif(mightbeif)) 7615 ++elselevel; 7616 continue; 7617 } 7618 7619 /* 7620 * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to 7621 * another "do", so increment whilelevel. XXX 7622 */ 7623 if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 7624 { 7625 ++whilelevel; 7626 continue; 7627 } 7628 7629 /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */ 7630 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7631 if (cin_isif(look)) 7632 { 7633 elselevel--; 7634 /* 7635 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that 7636 * get in the way. 7637 */ 7638 if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF) 7639 whilelevel = 0; 7640 } 7641 7642 /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */ 7643 if (cin_isdo(look)) 7644 whilelevel--; 7645 7646 /* 7647 * if we've used up all the elses, then 7648 * this must be the if that we want! 7649 * match the indent level of that if. 7650 */ 7651 if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0) 7652 { 7653 return OK; 7654 } 7655 } 7656 } 7657 return FAIL; 7658 } 7659 7660 # if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) 7661 /* 7662 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'. 7663 */ 7664 int 7665 get_expr_indent() 7666 { 7667 int indent; 7668 pos_T pos; 7669 int save_State; 7670 int use_sandbox = was_set_insecurely((char_u *)"indentexpr", 7671 OPT_LOCAL); 7672 7673 pos = curwin->w_cursor; 7674 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 7675 if (use_sandbox) 7676 ++sandbox; 7677 ++textlock; 7678 indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde); 7679 if (use_sandbox) 7680 --sandbox; 7681 --textlock; 7682 7683 /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to. 7684 * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o" 7685 * command. */ 7686 save_State = State; 7687 State = INSERT; 7688 curwin->w_cursor = pos; 7689 check_cursor(); 7690 State = save_State; 7691 7692 /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */ 7693 if (indent < 0) 7694 indent = get_indent(); 7695 7696 return indent; 7697 } 7698 # endif 7699 7700 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */ 7701 7702 #if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO) 7703 7704 static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p)); 7705 7706 static int 7707 lisp_match(p) 7708 char_u *p; 7709 { 7710 char_u buf[LSIZE]; 7711 int len; 7712 char_u *word = p_lispwords; 7713 7714 while (*word != NUL) 7715 { 7716 (void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ","); 7717 len = (int)STRLEN(buf); 7718 if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ') 7719 return TRUE; 7720 } 7721 return FALSE; 7722 } 7723 7724 /* 7725 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used. 7726 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting 7727 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still 7728 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, [email protected] 7729 * 7730 * TODO: 7731 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch 7732 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented: 7733 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals 7734 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon 7735 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal 7736 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases. 7737 * Update from Sergey Khorev: 7738 * I tried to fix the first two issues. 7739 */ 7740 int 7741 get_lisp_indent() 7742 { 7743 pos_T *pos, realpos, paren; 7744 int amount; 7745 char_u *that; 7746 colnr_T col; 7747 colnr_T firsttry; 7748 int parencount, quotecount; 7749 int vi_lisp; 7750 7751 /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */ 7752 vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL); 7753 7754 realpos = curwin->w_cursor; 7755 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7756 7757 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL) 7758 pos = findmatch(NULL, '['); 7759 else 7760 { 7761 paren = *pos; 7762 pos = findmatch(NULL, '['); 7763 if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren)) 7764 pos = &paren; 7765 } 7766 if (pos != NULL) 7767 { 7768 /* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white 7769 * line that is at the same () level. */ 7770 amount = -1; 7771 parencount = 0; 7772 7773 while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum) 7774 { 7775 if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 7776 continue; 7777 for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that) 7778 { 7779 if (*that == ';') 7780 { 7781 while (*(that + 1) != NUL) 7782 ++that; 7783 continue; 7784 } 7785 if (*that == '\\') 7786 { 7787 if (*(that + 1) != NUL) 7788 ++that; 7789 continue; 7790 } 7791 if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL) 7792 { 7793 that++; 7794 while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\')) 7795 ++that; 7796 } 7797 if (*that == '(' || *that == '[') 7798 ++parencount; 7799 else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']') 7800 --parencount; 7801 } 7802 if (parencount == 0) 7803 { 7804 amount = get_indent(); 7805 break; 7806 } 7807 } 7808 7809 if (amount == -1) 7810 { 7811 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 7812 curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col; 7813 col = pos->col; 7814 7815 that = ml_get_curline(); 7816 7817 if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0) 7818 amount = 2; 7819 else 7820 { 7821 amount = 0; 7822 while (*that && col) 7823 { 7824 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount); 7825 col--; 7826 } 7827 7828 /* 7829 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the 7830 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms): 7831 * 7832 * (let ((a 1)) instead (let ((a 1)) 7833 * (...)) of (...)) 7834 */ 7835 7836 if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[') 7837 && lisp_match(that + 1)) 7838 amount += 2; 7839 else 7840 { 7841 that++; 7842 amount++; 7843 firsttry = amount; 7844 7845 while (vim_iswhite(*that)) 7846 { 7847 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount); 7848 ++that; 7849 } 7850 7851 if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */ 7852 { 7853 /* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do 7854 * argument if it is more than one line */ 7855 if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[') 7856 firsttry++; 7857 7858 parencount = 0; 7859 quotecount = 0; 7860 7861 if (vi_lisp 7862 || (*that != '"' 7863 && *that != '\'' 7864 && *that != '#' 7865 && (*that < '0' || *that > '9'))) 7866 { 7867 while (*that 7868 && (!vim_iswhite(*that) 7869 || quotecount 7870 || parencount) 7871 && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[') 7872 && !quotecount 7873 && !parencount 7874 && vi_lisp))) 7875 { 7876 if (*that == '"') 7877 quotecount = !quotecount; 7878 if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[') 7879 && !quotecount) 7880 ++parencount; 7881 if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']') 7882 && !quotecount) 7883 --parencount; 7884 if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL) 7885 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, 7886 (colnr_T)amount); 7887 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, 7888 (colnr_T)amount); 7889 } 7890 } 7891 while (vim_iswhite(*that)) 7892 { 7893 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount); 7894 that++; 7895 } 7896 if (!*that || *that == ';') 7897 amount = firsttry; 7898 } 7899 } 7900 } 7901 } 7902 } 7903 else 7904 amount = 0; /* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */ 7905 7906 curwin->w_cursor = realpos; 7907 7908 return amount; 7909 } 7910 #endif /* FEAT_LISP */ 7911 7912 void 7913 prepare_to_exit() 7914 { 7915 #if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN) 7916 /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which 7917 * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance 7918 * problems. */ 7919 signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN); 7920 #endif 7921 7922 #ifdef FEAT_GUI 7923 if (gui.in_use) 7924 { 7925 gui.dying = TRUE; 7926 out_trash(); /* trash any pending output */ 7927 } 7928 else 7929 #endif 7930 { 7931 windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0); 7932 7933 /* 7934 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal" 7935 * screen (if there are two screens). 7936 */ 7937 settmode(TMODE_COOK); 7938 #ifdef WIN3264 7939 if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE) 7940 #endif 7941 stoptermcap(); 7942 out_flush(); 7943 } 7944 } 7945 7946 /* 7947 * Preserve files and exit. 7948 * When called IObuff must contain a message. 7949 */ 7950 void 7951 preserve_exit() 7952 { 7953 buf_T *buf; 7954 7955 prepare_to_exit(); 7956 7957 /* Setting this will prevent free() calls. That avoids calling free() 7958 * recursively when free() was invoked with a bad pointer. */ 7959 really_exiting = TRUE; 7960 7961 out_str(IObuff); 7962 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */ 7963 out_flush(); 7964 7965 ml_close_notmod(); /* close all not-modified buffers */ 7966 7967 for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next) 7968 { 7969 if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL) 7970 { 7971 OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n")); 7972 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */ 7973 out_flush(); 7974 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ 7975 break; 7976 } 7977 } 7978 7979 ml_close_all(FALSE); /* close all memfiles, without deleting */ 7980 7981 OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n")); 7982 7983 getout(1); 7984 } 7985 7986 /* 7987 * return TRUE if "fname" exists. 7988 */ 7989 int 7990 vim_fexists(fname) 7991 char_u *fname; 7992 { 7993 struct stat st; 7994 7995 if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st)) 7996 return FALSE; 7997 return TRUE; 7998 } 7999 8000 /* 8001 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while. 8002 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for 8003 * each line in the file. Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much 8004 * time, because it can be a system call. 8005 */ 8006 8007 #ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP 8008 # ifdef FEAT_GUI /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */ 8009 # define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200 8010 # else 8011 # define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32 8012 # endif 8013 #endif 8014 8015 static int breakcheck_count = 0; 8016 8017 void 8018 line_breakcheck() 8019 { 8020 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP) 8021 { 8022 breakcheck_count = 0; 8023 ui_breakcheck(); 8024 } 8025 } 8026 8027 /* 8028 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often. 8029 */ 8030 void 8031 fast_breakcheck() 8032 { 8033 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10) 8034 { 8035 breakcheck_count = 0; 8036 ui_breakcheck(); 8037 } 8038 } 8039 8040 /* 8041 * Expand wildcards. Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching 8042 * 'wildignore'. 8043 * Returns OK or FAIL. 8044 */ 8045 int 8046 expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags) 8047 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */ 8048 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */ 8049 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */ 8050 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */ 8051 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */ 8052 { 8053 int retval; 8054 int i, j; 8055 char_u *p; 8056 int non_suf_match; /* number without matching suffix */ 8057 8058 retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 8059 8060 /* When keeping all matches, return here */ 8061 if (flags & EW_KEEPALL) 8062 return retval; 8063 8064 #ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN 8065 /* 8066 * Remove names that match 'wildignore'. 8067 */ 8068 if (*p_wig) 8069 { 8070 char_u *ffname; 8071 8072 /* check all files in (*file)[] */ 8073 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i) 8074 { 8075 ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE); 8076 if (ffname == NULL) /* out of memory */ 8077 break; 8078 # ifdef VMS 8079 vms_remove_version(ffname); 8080 # endif 8081 if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname)) 8082 { 8083 /* remove this matching file from the list */ 8084 vim_free((*file)[i]); 8085 for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j) 8086 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1]; 8087 --*num_file; 8088 --i; 8089 } 8090 vim_free(ffname); 8091 } 8092 } 8093 #endif 8094 8095 /* 8096 * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end. 8097 */ 8098 if (*num_file > 1) 8099 { 8100 non_suf_match = 0; 8101 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i) 8102 { 8103 if (!match_suffix((*file)[i])) 8104 { 8105 /* 8106 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front 8107 * of the list. 8108 */ 8109 p = (*file)[i]; 8110 for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j) 8111 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1]; 8112 (*file)[non_suf_match++] = p; 8113 } 8114 } 8115 } 8116 8117 return retval; 8118 } 8119 8120 /* 8121 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'. 8122 */ 8123 int 8124 match_suffix(fname) 8125 char_u *fname; 8126 { 8127 int fnamelen, setsuflen; 8128 char_u *setsuf; 8129 #define MAXSUFLEN 30 /* maximum length of a file suffix */ 8130 char_u suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN]; 8131 8132 fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname); 8133 setsuflen = 0; 8134 for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; ) 8135 { 8136 setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,"); 8137 if (fnamelen >= setsuflen 8138 && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen, 8139 (size_t)setsuflen) == 0) 8140 break; 8141 setsuflen = 0; 8142 } 8143 return (setsuflen != 0); 8144 } 8145 8146 #if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO) 8147 8148 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8149 static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p)); 8150 static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags)); 8151 # endif 8152 8153 # if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264) 8154 /* 8155 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32. It's here because 8156 * it's shared between these systems. 8157 */ 8158 # if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO) 8159 # define _cdecl /* DJGPP doesn't have this */ 8160 # else 8161 # ifdef __BORLANDC__ 8162 # define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF 8163 # endif 8164 # endif 8165 8166 /* 8167 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath() 8168 */ 8169 static int _cdecl 8170 pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b) 8171 { 8172 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1)); 8173 } 8174 8175 # ifndef WIN3264 8176 static void 8177 namelowcpy( 8178 char_u *d, 8179 char_u *s) 8180 { 8181 # ifdef DJGPP 8182 if (USE_LONG_FNAME) /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */ 8183 while (*s) 8184 *d++ = *s++; 8185 else 8186 # endif 8187 while (*s) 8188 *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++); 8189 *d = NUL; 8190 } 8191 # endif 8192 8193 /* 8194 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or 8195 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc. 8196 * Return the number of matches found. 8197 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting 8198 * at "path[wildoff]". 8199 * Return the number of matches found. 8200 * NOTE: much of this is identical to unix_expandpath(), keep in sync! 8201 */ 8202 static int 8203 dos_expandpath( 8204 garray_T *gap, 8205 char_u *path, 8206 int wildoff, 8207 int flags, /* EW_* flags */ 8208 int didstar) /* expaneded "**" once already */ 8209 { 8210 char_u *buf; 8211 char_u *path_end; 8212 char_u *p, *s, *e; 8213 int start_len = gap->ga_len; 8214 char_u *pat; 8215 regmatch_T regmatch; 8216 int starts_with_dot; 8217 int matches; 8218 int len; 8219 int starstar = FALSE; 8220 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */ 8221 #ifdef WIN3264 8222 WIN32_FIND_DATA fb; 8223 HANDLE hFind = (HANDLE)0; 8224 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8225 WIN32_FIND_DATAW wfb; 8226 WCHAR *wn = NULL; /* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */ 8227 # endif 8228 #else 8229 struct ffblk fb; 8230 #endif 8231 char_u *matchname; 8232 int ok; 8233 8234 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */ 8235 if (stardepth > 0) 8236 { 8237 ui_breakcheck(); 8238 if (got_int) 8239 return 0; 8240 } 8241 8242 /* make room for file name */ 8243 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5); 8244 if (buf == NULL) 8245 return 0; 8246 8247 /* 8248 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1. 8249 * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters. 8250 */ 8251 p = buf; 8252 s = buf; 8253 e = NULL; 8254 path_end = path; 8255 while (*path_end != NUL) 8256 { 8257 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will 8258 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */ 8259 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end)) 8260 *p++ = *path_end++; 8261 else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/') 8262 { 8263 if (e != NULL) 8264 break; 8265 s = p + 1; 8266 } 8267 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff 8268 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL) 8269 e = p; 8270 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8271 if (has_mbyte) 8272 { 8273 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end); 8274 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len); 8275 p += len; 8276 path_end += len; 8277 } 8278 else 8279 #endif 8280 *p++ = *path_end++; 8281 } 8282 e = p; 8283 *e = NUL; 8284 8285 /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */ 8286 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard 8287 * component. */ 8288 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p) 8289 if (rem_backslash(p)) 8290 { 8291 STRCPY(p, p + 1); 8292 --e; 8293 --s; 8294 } 8295 8296 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */ 8297 for (p = s; p < e; ++p) 8298 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*') 8299 starstar = TRUE; 8300 8301 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.'); 8302 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE); 8303 if (pat == NULL) 8304 { 8305 vim_free(buf); 8306 return 0; 8307 } 8308 8309 /* compile the regexp into a program */ 8310 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Always ignore case */ 8311 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC); 8312 vim_free(pat); 8313 8314 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL) 8315 { 8316 vim_free(buf); 8317 return 0; 8318 } 8319 8320 /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */ 8321 matchname = vim_strsave(s); 8322 8323 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more 8324 * is following then find matches without any directory. */ 8325 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2 8326 && *path_end == '/') 8327 { 8328 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1); 8329 ++stardepth; 8330 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE); 8331 --stardepth; 8332 } 8333 8334 /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */ 8335 STRCPY(s, "*.*"); 8336 #ifdef WIN3264 8337 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8338 if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage) 8339 { 8340 /* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'. Attempt using the 8341 * wide function. If it fails because it is not implemented fall back 8342 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */ 8343 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL); 8344 if (wn != NULL) 8345 { 8346 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb); 8347 if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE 8348 && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED) 8349 { 8350 vim_free(wn); 8351 wn = NULL; 8352 } 8353 } 8354 } 8355 8356 if (wn == NULL) 8357 # endif 8358 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb); 8359 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE); 8360 #else 8361 /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */ 8362 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb, 8363 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0); 8364 #endif 8365 8366 while (ok) 8367 { 8368 #ifdef WIN3264 8369 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8370 if (wn != NULL) 8371 p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL); /* p is allocated here */ 8372 else 8373 # endif 8374 p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName; 8375 #else 8376 p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name; 8377 #endif 8378 /* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for. Accept 8379 * all entries found with "matchname". */ 8380 if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot) 8381 && (matchname == NULL 8382 || vim_regexec(®match, p, (colnr_T)0))) 8383 { 8384 #ifdef WIN3264 8385 STRCPY(s, p); 8386 #else 8387 namelowcpy(s, p); 8388 #endif 8389 len = (int)STRLEN(buf); 8390 8391 if (starstar && stardepth < 100) 8392 { 8393 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to 8394 * find matches. */ 8395 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**"); 8396 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end); 8397 ++stardepth; 8398 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE); 8399 --stardepth; 8400 } 8401 8402 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end); 8403 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) 8404 { 8405 /* need to expand another component of the path */ 8406 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8407 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE); 8408 } 8409 else 8410 { 8411 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */ 8412 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8413 if (*path_end != 0) 8414 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1); 8415 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */ 8416 addfile(gap, buf, flags); 8417 } 8418 } 8419 8420 #ifdef WIN3264 8421 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8422 if (wn != NULL) 8423 { 8424 vim_free(p); 8425 ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb); 8426 } 8427 else 8428 # endif 8429 ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb); 8430 #else 8431 ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0); 8432 #endif 8433 8434 /* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name 8435 * itself. Finds the long name of a short filename. */ 8436 if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len) 8437 { 8438 STRCPY(s, matchname); 8439 #ifdef WIN3264 8440 FindClose(hFind); 8441 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8442 if (wn != NULL) 8443 { 8444 vim_free(wn); 8445 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL); 8446 if (wn != NULL) 8447 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb); 8448 } 8449 if (wn == NULL) 8450 # endif 8451 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb); 8452 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE); 8453 #else 8454 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb, 8455 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0); 8456 #endif 8457 vim_free(matchname); 8458 matchname = NULL; 8459 } 8460 } 8461 8462 #ifdef WIN3264 8463 FindClose(hFind); 8464 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8465 vim_free(wn); 8466 # endif 8467 #endif 8468 vim_free(buf); 8469 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 8470 vim_free(matchname); 8471 8472 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len; 8473 if (matches > 0) 8474 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches, 8475 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp); 8476 return matches; 8477 } 8478 8479 int 8480 mch_expandpath( 8481 garray_T *gap, 8482 char_u *path, 8483 int flags) /* EW_* flags */ 8484 { 8485 return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags, FALSE); 8486 } 8487 # endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */ 8488 8489 #if (defined(UNIX) && !defined(VMS)) || defined(USE_UNIXFILENAME) \ 8490 || defined(PROTO) 8491 /* 8492 * Unix style wildcard expansion code. 8493 * It's here because it's used both for Unix and Mac. 8494 */ 8495 static int pstrcmp __ARGS((const void *, const void *)); 8496 8497 static int 8498 pstrcmp(a, b) 8499 const void *a, *b; 8500 { 8501 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1)); 8502 } 8503 8504 /* 8505 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or 8506 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc. 8507 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting 8508 * at "path + wildoff". 8509 * Return the number of matches found. 8510 * NOTE: much of this is identical to dos_expandpath(), keep in sync! 8511 */ 8512 int 8513 unix_expandpath(gap, path, wildoff, flags, didstar) 8514 garray_T *gap; 8515 char_u *path; 8516 int wildoff; 8517 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 8518 int didstar; /* expanded "**" once already */ 8519 { 8520 char_u *buf; 8521 char_u *path_end; 8522 char_u *p, *s, *e; 8523 int start_len = gap->ga_len; 8524 char_u *pat; 8525 regmatch_T regmatch; 8526 int starts_with_dot; 8527 int matches; 8528 int len; 8529 int starstar = FALSE; 8530 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */ 8531 8532 DIR *dirp; 8533 struct dirent *dp; 8534 8535 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */ 8536 if (stardepth > 0) 8537 { 8538 ui_breakcheck(); 8539 if (got_int) 8540 return 0; 8541 } 8542 8543 /* make room for file name */ 8544 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5); 8545 if (buf == NULL) 8546 return 0; 8547 8548 /* 8549 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard. 8550 * Copy it into "buf", including the preceding characters. 8551 */ 8552 p = buf; 8553 s = buf; 8554 e = NULL; 8555 path_end = path; 8556 while (*path_end != NUL) 8557 { 8558 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will 8559 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */ 8560 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end)) 8561 *p++ = *path_end++; 8562 else if (*path_end == '/') 8563 { 8564 if (e != NULL) 8565 break; 8566 s = p + 1; 8567 } 8568 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff 8569 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[{~$", *path_end) != NULL) 8570 e = p; 8571 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8572 if (has_mbyte) 8573 { 8574 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end); 8575 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len); 8576 p += len; 8577 path_end += len; 8578 } 8579 else 8580 #endif 8581 *p++ = *path_end++; 8582 } 8583 e = p; 8584 *e = NUL; 8585 8586 /* now we have one wildcard component between "s" and "e" */ 8587 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard 8588 * component. */ 8589 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p) 8590 if (rem_backslash(p)) 8591 { 8592 STRCPY(p, p + 1); 8593 --e; 8594 --s; 8595 } 8596 8597 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */ 8598 for (p = s; p < e; ++p) 8599 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*') 8600 starstar = TRUE; 8601 8602 /* convert the file pattern to a regexp pattern */ 8603 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.'); 8604 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE); 8605 if (pat == NULL) 8606 { 8607 vim_free(buf); 8608 return 0; 8609 } 8610 8611 /* compile the regexp into a program */ 8612 #ifdef CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME 8613 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Behave like Terminal.app */ 8614 #else 8615 regmatch.rm_ic = FALSE; /* Don't ever ignore case */ 8616 #endif 8617 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC); 8618 vim_free(pat); 8619 8620 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL) 8621 { 8622 vim_free(buf); 8623 return 0; 8624 } 8625 8626 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more 8627 * is following then find matches without any directory. */ 8628 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2 8629 && *path_end == '/') 8630 { 8631 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1); 8632 ++stardepth; 8633 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE); 8634 --stardepth; 8635 } 8636 8637 /* open the directory for scanning */ 8638 *s = NUL; 8639 dirp = opendir(*buf == NUL ? "." : (char *)buf); 8640 8641 /* Find all matching entries */ 8642 if (dirp != NULL) 8643 { 8644 for (;;) 8645 { 8646 dp = readdir(dirp); 8647 if (dp == NULL) 8648 break; 8649 if ((dp->d_name[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot) 8650 && vim_regexec(®match, (char_u *)dp->d_name, (colnr_T)0)) 8651 { 8652 STRCPY(s, dp->d_name); 8653 len = STRLEN(buf); 8654 8655 if (starstar && stardepth < 100) 8656 { 8657 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to 8658 * find matches. */ 8659 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**"); 8660 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end); 8661 ++stardepth; 8662 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE); 8663 --stardepth; 8664 } 8665 8666 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end); 8667 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) /* handle more wildcards */ 8668 { 8669 /* need to expand another component of the path */ 8670 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8671 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE); 8672 } 8673 else 8674 { 8675 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */ 8676 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8677 if (*path_end != NUL) 8678 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1); 8679 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */ 8680 { 8681 #ifdef MACOS_CONVERT 8682 size_t precomp_len = STRLEN(buf)+1; 8683 char_u *precomp_buf = 8684 mac_precompose_path(buf, precomp_len, &precomp_len); 8685 8686 if (precomp_buf) 8687 { 8688 mch_memmove(buf, precomp_buf, precomp_len); 8689 vim_free(precomp_buf); 8690 } 8691 #endif 8692 addfile(gap, buf, flags); 8693 } 8694 } 8695 } 8696 } 8697 8698 closedir(dirp); 8699 } 8700 8701 vim_free(buf); 8702 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 8703 8704 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len; 8705 if (matches > 0) 8706 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, matches, 8707 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp); 8708 return matches; 8709 } 8710 #endif 8711 8712 /* 8713 * Generic wildcard expansion code. 8714 * 8715 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a 8716 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*" 8717 * 8718 * Return FAIL when no single file was found. In this case "num_file" is not 8719 * set, and "file" may contain an error message. 8720 * Return OK when some files found. "num_file" is set to the number of 8721 * matches, "file" to the array of matches. Call FreeWild() later. 8722 */ 8723 int 8724 gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags) 8725 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */ 8726 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */ 8727 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */ 8728 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */ 8729 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 8730 { 8731 int i; 8732 garray_T ga; 8733 char_u *p; 8734 static int recursive = FALSE; 8735 int add_pat; 8736 8737 /* 8738 * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user". If this fails, 8739 * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here. In this case, always 8740 * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible. Otherwise, 8741 * return FAIL. 8742 */ 8743 if (recursive) 8744 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR 8745 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 8746 #else 8747 return FAIL; 8748 #endif 8749 8750 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR 8751 /* 8752 * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle 8753 * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion. This 8754 * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately. 8755 * For `=expr` do use the internal function. 8756 */ 8757 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++) 8758 { 8759 if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL 8760 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8761 && !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=') 8762 # endif 8763 ) 8764 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 8765 } 8766 #endif 8767 8768 recursive = TRUE; 8769 8770 /* 8771 * The matching file names are stored in a growarray. Init it empty. 8772 */ 8773 ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30); 8774 8775 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i) 8776 { 8777 add_pat = -1; 8778 p = pat[i]; 8779 8780 #ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8781 if (vim_backtick(p)) 8782 add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags); 8783 else 8784 #endif 8785 { 8786 /* 8787 * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/". 8788 */ 8789 if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL) 8790 { 8791 p = expand_env_save(p); 8792 if (p == NULL) 8793 p = pat[i]; 8794 #ifdef UNIX 8795 /* 8796 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment 8797 * variable, use the shell to do that. Discard previously 8798 * found file names and start all over again. 8799 */ 8800 else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL) 8801 { 8802 vim_free(p); 8803 ga_clear(&ga); 8804 i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, 8805 flags); 8806 recursive = FALSE; 8807 return i; 8808 } 8809 #endif 8810 } 8811 8812 /* 8813 * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to 8814 * the list. If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add 8815 * the pattern. 8816 * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or 8817 * when EW_NOTFOUND is given. 8818 */ 8819 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p)) 8820 add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags); 8821 } 8822 8823 if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND))) 8824 { 8825 char_u *t = backslash_halve_save(p); 8826 8827 #if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC) 8828 slash_to_colon(t); 8829 #endif 8830 /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs. Makes 8831 * "vim c:/" work. */ 8832 if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND) 8833 addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE); 8834 else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0) 8835 addfile(&ga, t, flags); 8836 vim_free(t); 8837 } 8838 8839 if (p != pat[i]) 8840 vim_free(p); 8841 } 8842 8843 *num_file = ga.ga_len; 8844 *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)""; 8845 8846 recursive = FALSE; 8847 8848 return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL; 8849 } 8850 8851 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8852 8853 /* 8854 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here. 8855 */ 8856 static int 8857 vim_backtick(p) 8858 char_u *p; 8859 { 8860 return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`'); 8861 } 8862 8863 /* 8864 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command. 8865 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `. 8866 * Returns number of file names found. 8867 */ 8868 static int 8869 expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags) 8870 garray_T *gap; 8871 char_u *pat; 8872 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 8873 { 8874 char_u *p; 8875 char_u *cmd; 8876 char_u *buffer; 8877 int cnt = 0; 8878 int i; 8879 8880 /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */ 8881 cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2); 8882 if (cmd == NULL) 8883 return 0; 8884 8885 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL 8886 if (*cmd == '=') /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */ 8887 buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p, TRUE); 8888 else 8889 #endif 8890 buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL, 8891 (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0); 8892 vim_free(cmd); 8893 if (buffer == NULL) 8894 return 0; 8895 8896 cmd = buffer; 8897 while (*cmd != NUL) 8898 { 8899 cmd = skipwhite(cmd); /* skip over white space */ 8900 p = cmd; 8901 while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */ 8902 ++p; 8903 /* add an entry if it is not empty */ 8904 if (p > cmd) 8905 { 8906 i = *p; 8907 *p = NUL; 8908 addfile(gap, cmd, flags); 8909 *p = i; 8910 ++cnt; 8911 } 8912 cmd = p; 8913 while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n')) 8914 ++cmd; 8915 } 8916 8917 vim_free(buffer); 8918 return cnt; 8919 } 8920 # endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */ 8921 8922 /* 8923 * Add a file to a file list. Accepted flags: 8924 * EW_DIR add directories 8925 * EW_FILE add files 8926 * EW_EXEC add executable files 8927 * EW_NOTFOUND add even when it doesn't exist 8928 * EW_ADDSLASH add slash after directory name 8929 */ 8930 void 8931 addfile(gap, f, flags) 8932 garray_T *gap; 8933 char_u *f; /* filename */ 8934 int flags; 8935 { 8936 char_u *p; 8937 int isdir; 8938 8939 /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */ 8940 if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0) 8941 return; 8942 8943 #ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL 8944 /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */ 8945 if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL) 8946 return; 8947 #endif 8948 8949 isdir = mch_isdir(f); 8950 if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE))) 8951 return; 8952 8953 /* If the file isn't executable, may not add it. Do accept directories. */ 8954 if (!isdir && (flags & EW_EXEC) && !mch_can_exe(f)) 8955 return; 8956 8957 /* Make room for another item in the file list. */ 8958 if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL) 8959 return; 8960 8961 p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir)); 8962 if (p == NULL) 8963 return; 8964 8965 STRCPY(p, f); 8966 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 8967 slash_adjust(p); 8968 #endif 8969 /* 8970 * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present. 8971 */ 8972 #ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR 8973 if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH)) 8974 add_pathsep(p); 8975 #endif 8976 ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p; 8977 } 8978 #endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */ 8979 8980 #if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) 8981 8982 #ifndef SEEK_SET 8983 # define SEEK_SET 0 8984 #endif 8985 #ifndef SEEK_END 8986 # define SEEK_END 2 8987 #endif 8988 8989 /* 8990 * Get the stdout of an external command. 8991 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error. 8992 */ 8993 char_u * 8994 get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags) 8995 char_u *cmd; 8996 char_u *infile; /* optional input file name */ 8997 int flags; /* can be SHELL_SILENT */ 8998 { 8999 char_u *tempname; 9000 char_u *command; 9001 char_u *buffer = NULL; 9002 int len; 9003 int i = 0; 9004 FILE *fd; 9005 9006 if (check_restricted() || check_secure()) 9007 return NULL; 9008 9009 /* get a name for the temp file */ 9010 if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL) 9011 { 9012 EMSG(_(e_notmp)); 9013 return NULL; 9014 } 9015 9016 /* Add the redirection stuff */ 9017 command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname); 9018 if (command == NULL) 9019 goto done; 9020 9021 /* 9022 * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored). 9023 * Don't check timestamps here. 9024 */ 9025 ++no_check_timestamps; 9026 call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags); 9027 --no_check_timestamps; 9028 9029 vim_free(command); 9030 9031 /* 9032 * read the names from the file into memory 9033 */ 9034 # ifdef VMS 9035 /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */ 9036 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r"); 9037 # else 9038 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN); 9039 # endif 9040 9041 if (fd == NULL) 9042 { 9043 EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname); 9044 goto done; 9045 } 9046 9047 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END); 9048 len = ftell(fd); /* get size of temp file */ 9049 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET); 9050 9051 buffer = alloc(len + 1); 9052 if (buffer != NULL) 9053 i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd); 9054 fclose(fd); 9055 mch_remove(tempname); 9056 if (buffer == NULL) 9057 goto done; 9058 #ifdef VMS 9059 len = i; /* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */ 9060 #endif 9061 if (i != len) 9062 { 9063 EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname); 9064 vim_free(buffer); 9065 buffer = NULL; 9066 } 9067 else 9068 buffer[len] = '\0'; /* make sure the buffer is terminated */ 9069 9070 done: 9071 vim_free(tempname); 9072 return buffer; 9073 } 9074 #endif 9075 9076 /* 9077 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion 9078 * functions. 9079 */ 9080 void 9081 FreeWild(count, files) 9082 int count; 9083 char_u **files; 9084 { 9085 if (files == NULL || count <= 0) 9086 return; 9087 #if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */ 9088 /* 9089 * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have 9090 * been used??? 9091 */ 9092 _fnexplodefree((char **)files); 9093 #else 9094 while (count--) 9095 vim_free(files[count]); 9096 vim_free(files); 9097 #endif 9098 } 9099 9100 /* 9101 * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'. 9102 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping. 9103 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command. 9104 */ 9105 int 9106 goto_im() 9107 { 9108 return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed()); 9109 } 9110